BMW - X2 - Owners Manual - 2022 - 2022 (2)

LINK: CONTENT & A-Z The Ultimate Driving Machine® OWNER'S MANUAL. THE BMW X2. Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 WELCOME TO BMW. Owner's Manual. Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐ board literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride. 3 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 TABLE OF CONTENTS Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. NOTES Information ......................................................................................................................... 6 QUICK REFERENCE Entering ............................................................................................................................ 14 Set-up and use ............................................................................................................... 18 On the road ...................................................................................................................... 22 AT A GLANCE Cockpit .............................................................................................................................. 30 iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 34 Voice activation system ............................................................................................... 42 General settings ............................................................................................................. 46 Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 57 CONTROLS Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 60 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel ............................................................................. 82 Transporting children safely ....................................................................................... 93 Driving ............................................................................................................................... 99 Displays .......................................................................................................................... 122 Lights .............................................................................................................................. 138 Safety .............................................................................................................................. 143 Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 164 Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 171 Climate control ............................................................................................................. 191 Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 199 Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 211 4 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 216 Loading .......................................................................................................................... 220 Reducing fuel consumption ..................................................................................... 223 MOBILITY Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 230 Fuel .................................................................................................................................. 232 Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 234 Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 253 Engine oil ....................................................................................................................... 256 Coolant ........................................................................................................................... 260 Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 262 Replacing components .............................................................................................. 264 Breakdown assistance ............................................................................................... 271 Care ................................................................................................................................. 278 REFERENCE Technical data .............................................................................................................. 284 Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 286 Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 288 © 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English ID5 II/21, 03 21 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. 5 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 NOTES Information Information Using this Owner's Manual Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Orientation The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐ scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐ cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. Additional information, refer to page 57. The fastest way to find information on a particu‐ lar topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter. Updates made after the editorial deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ ences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment, and Communication can be obtained as a printed book from the service center. The topics are also discussed in the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Additional sources of information BMW Driver's Guide app Driver’s Guide App shows the most suitable in‐ formation for the selected vehicle. If possible, only equipment and functions that are actually in‐ stalled in the vehicle will be explained. BMW Driver’s Guide Web Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable in‐ formation for the selected vehicle. If possible, only equipment and functions that are actually in‐ stalled in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be displayed in any current browser. Symbols and displays Symbols in the Owner's Manual Icon Meaning Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle. Service center A service center will be glad to answer questions at any time. Internet Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment. "..." Vehicle information and general information on BMW, for instance, on technology, are available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com. Texts in vehicle used to select individual functions. 6 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Information Icon Meaning ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system. ››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice activation system. Action steps Action steps to be carried out are presented as a numbered list. The steps must be carried out in the defined order. 1. First action step. 2. Second action step. NOTES When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary Owner's Manuals. Your dealer’s service center is happy to answer any questions that you may have about the fea‐ tures and options applicable to your vehicle. Status of the Owner's Manual Basic information Enumerations Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐ native possibilities are presented as a list with bullet points. ▷ First possibility. ▷ Second possibility. Icons on vehicle components This symbol on a vehicle component indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual. Vehicle features and options This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐ ment that is offered in the model series. There‐ fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐ lustrates features and functions that are not available in a vehicle, for example because of the selected optional features or the country-specific version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐ icy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle. Updates made after the editorial deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ ences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. For Your Own Safety Intended use Heed the following when using the vehicle: ▷ Owner's Manual. ▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove stickers. ▷ Technical vehicle data. 7 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Information NOTES ▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the vehicle is driven. ▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents. Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐ erating conditions and registration requirements applying in the country of first delivery, also known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be neces‐ sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing operating conditions and registration require‐ ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information on war‐ ranty is available from a service center. Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, for instance the use of modern materials and high-performance elec‐ tronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to a BMW center. If you choose to use another serv‐ ice facility, BMW recommends use of a facility that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair, according to BMW specifications with properly trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's Manual as "another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop". If work is performed improperly, for instance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐ quent damage and related safety risks. Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of compo‐ nents, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result in a safety risk. Parts and accessories BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐ sory products approved by BMW. Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from a BMW center. BMW parts and accessories have been tested by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐ cles. BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐ sories. BMW does not evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific official approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for BMW vehicles under all usage conditions. California Proposition 65 Warning For vehicles sold in California, the law requires vehicle manufacturers to provide the following warning: Warning Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐ bile components and parts, including compo‐ nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐ tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause can‐ cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐ gine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. 8 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Information NOTES case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐ ther information. Warning Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐ ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐ haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐ cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐ hicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐ ing warranties: ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty. ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. ▷ California Emission Control System Limited Warranty. Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating condi‐ tions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐ ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐ ate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐ mologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Specifications for maintenance measures: ▷ BMW Maintenance system. ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models. ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly maintained, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Refer to section on engine oil change regarding recommended service intervals for oil changes. Data memory General information Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐ hicle. Electronic control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or exchange with each other. Some control units are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or provide assistance during driving, for instance driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions. Information about stored or exchanged data can be requested from the manufacturer of the vehi‐ cle, in a separate booklet, for example. Personal reference Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehi‐ cle identification number, license plate and corre‐ sponding authorities. In addition, there are other options to track data collected in the vehicle to 9 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 NOTES Information the driver or vehicle owner, for instance, via the ConnectedDrive account that is used. Operating data in the vehicle Control units process data to operate the vehicle. For example, this includes: ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐ vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational speed, wheel speed, deceleration, lateral ac‐ celeration, engaged safety belt indicator. ▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain sensor signals. The processed data is only processed in the ve‐ hicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not stored beyond the operating period. Electronic components, e.g. control units and ig‐ nition keys, contain components for storing tech‐ nical information. Information about the vehicle condition, component usage, maintenance rec‐ ommendations, events or faults can be stored temporarily or permanently. When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐ ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐ ance measures, this technical information can be read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐ cle identification number. A dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop can read out the in‐ formation. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagno‐ sis required by law in the vehicle is used to read out the data. The data is collected, processed, and used by the relevant organizations in the service network. The data documents technical conditions of the vehicle, which can be used to determine vehicle maintenance status, and facilitate quality im‐ provement. Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be reset when a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop performs repair or servicing work. Data entry and data transfer into the vehicle This information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system, or the environ‐ ment, for instance: General information ▷ Operating states of system components, for instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat‐ tery status. Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort and individual settings can be stored in the vehi‐ cle and modified or reset at any time. ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system components, for instance lights and brakes. For example, this includes: ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐ ment of the driving stability control systems. ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events. The data is required to perform the control unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recog‐ nize and correct malfunctions, and helps the ve‐ hicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions. The majority of this data is stored temporarily and is only processed within the vehicle itself. In some circumstances the vehicle may store some data for an additional but limited period of time. ▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐ tions. ▷ Chassis and climate control settings. If necessary, data can be transferred to the en‐ tertainment and communication system of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone. This includes the following depending on the re‐ spective equipment: ▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐ tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system. ▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system. 10 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Information ▷ Entered navigation destinations. ▷ Data on the use of Internet services. This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is found on a device that has been connected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at any time. This data is only transmitted to third parties upon personal request as part of the use of online services. The transmission depends on the se‐ lected settings for the use of the services. Incorporation of mobile devices Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐ vices connected to the vehicle, for instance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle control elements. NOTES phones. This wireless network connection enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐ clude online services and apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by other providers. Services from the vehicle manufacturer Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐ turer are concerned, the corresponding functions are described in the appropriate place, for in‐ stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's website. The relevant legal information pertaining to data protection may also be found on the manufacturer’s website. Personal data may be used to perform online services. Data is ex‐ changed over a secure connection, for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose. The sound and picture from the mobile device can be played back and displayed through the multimedia system. Certain information is trans‐ ferred to the mobile device at the same time. De‐ pending on the type of incorporation, this in‐ cludes, for instance position data and other general vehicle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance naviga‐ tion or music playback, work. Any collection, processing, and use of personal data above and beyond that needed to provide the services must always be based on a legal permission, contractual arrangement or consent. It is also possible to activate or deactivate the data connection as a whole. That is, with the ex‐ ception of functions and services required by law such as Assist systems. There is no further interaction between the mo‐ bile device and the vehicle, such as active access to vehicle data. Services from other providers How the data will be processed further is deter‐ mined by the provider of the particular app being used. The extent of the possible settings de‐ pends on the respective app and the operating system of the mobile device. Services When using online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the rele‐ vant provider and subject to their data privacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐ facturer has no influence on the content ex‐ changed during this process. Information on the way in which personal data is collected and used in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐ tained from the relevant service provider. General information If the vehicle has a wireless network connection, this enables data to be exchanged between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐ ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐ ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐ Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ 11 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Information NOTES tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐ ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. ent positions in the vehicle. This chapter de‐ scribes all possible positions for the series. Engine compartment The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐ erating. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened. ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal. ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. This data can help provide a better understand‐ ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. The engraved vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle. Right nameplate EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐ corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐ tions and no personal data, for instance name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐ ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐ facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the in‐ formation if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of the vehicle. Vehicle identification number General information Depending on the national-market version, the vehicle identification number is located in differ‐ 12 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Information Left nameplate NOTES America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐ dividual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the vehicle. Windshield To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about mo‐ tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safetyrelated defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐ vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety. The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield. iDrive It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐ tion number via iDrive, refer to page 51. Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐ tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North 13 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Entering QUICK REFERENCE Entering Opening and closing All vehicle access points are locked. Buttons on the vehicle key Buttons for the central locking system Overview 1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Unlocking the tailgate Buttons for the central locking system. With automatic tailgate operation: open the tailgate 4 Panic mode Locking Press the button with the front doors closed. Unlocking the vehicle Press the button on the vehicle key. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. Unlocking Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐ er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐ locked. If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points. Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ cle key after unlocking. The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed. Press the button. Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐ self in a dangerous situation. Press the button on the vehicle key for at least 3 seconds. To switch off the alarm: press any button. Locking the vehicle Press the button on the vehicle key. 14 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Entering Comfort Access QUICK REFERENCE Concept With automatic tailgate operation: opening and closing the tailgate with no-touch activation The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key. Concept Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient. The tailgate can be opened and closed with notouch activation using the vehicle key you are carrying. The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐ rior. Unlocking the vehicle Performing the foot movement 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐ prox. one arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle. 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction of travel and immediately pull it back. With this movement, the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors. Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front passenger door completely. Locking the vehicle Tailgate Opening Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐ er's or front passenger door with your finger for approx. 1 second without grasping the door han‐ dle. ▷ Unlock the vehicle and press the top half of the BMW emblem. ▷ If carrying the vehicle key, press the top half of the BMW emblem. 15 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 QUICK REFERENCE ▷ Entering Press the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second. Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Closing 4 Wiper system 5 Start/Stop button Indicator/warning lights The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐ ety of combinations and colors. Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐ tioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on. Driver's door ▷ Press button on the inside of the tailgate, ar‐ row 1. ▷ Press button, arrow 2. The vehicle will be locked after closing the tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for this purpose and the vehicle key must be out‐ side of the vehicle in the area of the tailgate. 1 Safety switch 2 Power windows Displays and control elements 3 Exterior mirrors 4 Central locking system 5 With automatic tailgate operation: opening/ closing the tailgate In the vicinity of the steering wheel Switch console 1 Light switch element 1 Selector lever 2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal 2 Controller 3 Instrument cluster 3 Parking brake 16 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Entering 4 Driver assistance systems 5 Driving Dynamics Control QUICK REFERENCE This icon indicates that the voice control system is active. If no other commands are possible, operate the function via iDrive. iDrive Concept The iDrive combines the functions of many switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller. Terminating the voice control system Press the button on the steering wheel or ›Cancel‹. Buttons on the Controller Button Function Press once: calls up the main menu. Press twice: displays all menu items of the main menu. Goes to the Communication menu. Goes to the Media/Radio menu. Goes to destination input menu for navigation. Goes to navigation map. Press once: opens the previous dis‐ play. Press and hold: open the menus used last. Goes to the Options menu. Voice control Activating the voice control system 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command. 17 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use Set-up and use Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Adjusting the exterior mirrors Electrically adjustable seats 1 Adjusting 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Folding in and out 1 Memory function Adjusting the steering wheel 2 Backrest width 3 Lumbar support Manual steering wheel setting 4 Backrest tilt 5 Forward/back, height, tilt Adjusting the head restraint Height 1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seat position. 3. Fold the lever back up. Memory function ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up. ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push head restraint down. For equipment specification with M sport seat: The height of the head restraints cannot be set. Concept The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ essary, retrieved using the memory function: ▷ Seat position. ▷ Exterior mirror position. 18 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Set-up and use ▷ Height of the Head-up Display. 6 Changing the station/track 7 Programmable memory buttons Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position. 3. QUICK REFERENCE Press the button. The LED in the button lights up. Navigation destination input Entering a destination via address Via iDrive: 4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit. The LED goes out. State/province Calling up settings 2. Press the desired button 1 or 2. 3. "State/Province?" The stored position is called up automatically. 4. Select the country from the list. The procedure stops when a seat setting switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed. Entering the address Once underway, adjustment of the seat position on the driver's side is disabled after a short while. 1. "Navigation" "Enter address" The address can be entered in any order. Example: entering the address via the town/city 1. "City/Postal code?" Infotainment 2. Enter the town/city. The list is narrowed down further with each entry. Radio 3. Control elements Select the icon. 4. Select a town/city from the list. 5. If necessary, enter the street. 6. Select the street as you would the town/city. 7. If necessary, enter a house number. 8. Select the icon. 9. Select a house number or range of house numbers from the list. Starting destination guidance 1 Waveband/satellite radio "Start guidance" 2 Changing the entertainment source Destination guidance is started to the town/city center if no street is entered. 3 Sound output on/off, volume 4 Depending on the vehicle equipment: eject‐ ing a CD/DVD Connecting a mobile phone 5 Depending on the vehicle equipment: CD/DVD drive After the mobile phone is connected once to the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using 19 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE iDrive, the steering wheel buttons and spoken in‐ structions. Dialing a number 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Dial number" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. Enter the numbers. 3. "Mobile devices" 4. 1. "Communication" 4. "Connect new device" 5. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used. The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display. 6. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐ tooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐ tooth name of the vehicle. 7. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number must be entered. ▷ Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device. Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display. ▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐ ber on the device and via iDrive. The device is connected and displayed in the device list. Using the telephone Select the icon. The connection is estab‐ lished via the mobile phone to which this function has been assigned. Establish the connection via the additional tele‐ phone: 1. Press the button. 2. "Call via" Apple CarPlay preparation Concept CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and iDrive. Functional requirements ▷ Compatible iPhone: iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. ▷ Corresponding mobile contract. ▷ Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice operation are activated on the iPhone. ▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehi‐ cle. ▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must be activated on the iPhone. Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Accepting a call Via iDrive: Incoming calls can be accepted via iDrive or the button on the steering wheel. 1. "My Vehicle" Via iDrive 3. "Mobile devices" "Accept" 4. "Settings" Via the button on the steering wheel Press the button. 2. "iDrive settings" 5. Select the following settings: ▷ "Bluetooth®" ▷ "Apple CarPlay" 20 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle. Select CarPlay as the function: "Apple CarPlay" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐ played in the device list. 21 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 On the road QUICK REFERENCE On the road Driving Parking brake Starting and stopping the engine Ignition on/off ▷ On: press the Start/Stop but‐ ton. Most of the indicator/warning lights light up for a varied length of time. ▷ Off: press the Start/Stop button again. All indicator lights go out. ▷ Radio-ready state: when the ignition is switched off, press the ON/OFF button on the radio or when the engine is running, press the Start/Stop button. Some electrical consumers remain ready for operation. Setting Pull the switch. The LED on the switch and the indicator light in the instrument cluster are illuminated. Releasing With the ignition switched on: Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or selector lever posi‐ tion P is set. The LED and indicator light go out. The parking brake is released. Steptronic transmission Selector lever positions Parking position P. R is reverse. Start/stop engine Neutral N. Steptronic transmission: starting Gear position D. 1. Depress the brake pedal. Engage selector lever position P or R only when the vehicle is stationary. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Steptronic transmission: switching off 1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the parking brake. 2. Engage selector lever position P. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. Auto Start/Stop function Steptronic transmission: switches the engine off automatically to save fuel. The engine starts au‐ tomatically when the brake pedal is released. To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear position or reverse, maintain pres‐ sure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start. Selector lever lock A lock prevents an inadvertent change from se‐ lector lever position P to another selector lever position and, depending on the transmission ver‐ sion, inadvertent switching to selector lever posi‐ tion P or R. To release the lock: with the brake pedal de‐ pressed, press the button on the front or side of the selector lever. 22 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 On the road Steptronic transmission, Sport program and manual mode QUICK REFERENCE Turn signal ▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point. Sport program: Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D. ▷ Off: press the lever past the resistance point in the opposite direction. Manual mode: ▷ Off: lightly tap the lever to the resistance point. ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ward. ▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the lever up or down. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. ▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐ ance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash. High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal, roadside parking light Canada: roadside parking light High beams, headlight flasher To illuminate the vehicle on one side. Press the lever forward or pull it backward. ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on. ▷ On: with the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. ▷ Off: briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction. ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. 23 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 On the road QUICK REFERENCE Lights and lighting ▷ Rain sensor: position 1. ▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2. Light functions Icon ▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3. Function Switching off and brief wipe Bad weather light. Automatic headlight control. Cornering light and variable light distri‐ bution. Cornering light. Lights off. Daytime running lights. Parking lights. Press the lever down. ▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position. Low beams. ▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position. Instrument lighting. Rain sensor Activating/deactivating Wiper system Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe Switching on To activate: press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1. To deactivate: press the lever back into the standard position. Press the lever up until the desired position is reached. ▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0. 24 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 On the road Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor QUICK REFERENCE Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. ▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released. ▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released. Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever. Canada: wiper systemWiper system Cleaning the windshield and headlights Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe Switching on Pull the lever. Rear window wiper Switching on ▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once. ▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point. Switching off and brief wipe Turn the outer switch upward. ▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0. ▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐ tinuous operation. Push wiper lever down. ▷ Brief wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once. 25 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 On the road QUICK REFERENCE ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice. Rear window wiper Rain sensor Switching on Activating/deactivating Turn the outer switch upward. ▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0. Press the button on the wiper lever. Adjusting the sensitivity ▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐ tinuous operation. Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. ▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released. Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever. Cleaning the windshield and headlights ▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released. Climate control Air conditioner Button Function Temperature. Air conditioning. Pull the wiper lever towards you. Air recirculation mode. 26 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 On the road Button Function Button QUICK REFERENCE Function Air flow, manual. Seat heating. Air distribution, manual. Switches off the system. Refueling Rear window defroster. Seat heating. Automatic climate control Button Refueling Fuel cap 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens. Function Temperature. Air conditioning. Maximum cooling. AUTO program. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. Gasoline Recirculated-air mode/AUC. For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Air flow, manual. Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without met‐ allic additives. Air distribution, manual. Information on the recommended fuel grade can be found in the Owner's Manual. SYNC program. Defrost and defog window. Rear window defroster. 27 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 QUICK REFERENCE On the road Wheels and tires Adding engine oil Tire inflation pressure specifications General information Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehicle before engine oil is added. Adding engine oil The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar. After correcting the tire inflation pressure For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires. For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. Checking the tire inflation pressure Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed: ▷ At least twice a month. ▷ Before embarking on an extended trip. Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐ sage. Take care not to add too much engine oil. Observe recommended engine oil types. Providing assistance Hazard warning flashers Electronic oil measurement Requirements A current measured value is available after ap‐ prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is dis‐ played. Displaying the engine oil level 1. "My Vehicle" The button is located in the center console. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level" 28 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 On the road QUICK REFERENCE Breakdown assistance BMW Roadside Assistance Via iDrive: 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "BMW Assist" 3. "BMW Roadside Assistance" A voice connection is established to BMW Roadside Assistance. ConnectedDrive Concierge service The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐ mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and provides phone numbers and addresses. Many hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐ cierge service. The Concierge service is part of the optional BMW Assist Response Center. 1. "ConnectedDrive" 2. "Concierge" Teleservices Teleservices are services that help to maintain vehicle mobility. Depending on the equipment version, Teleservi‐ ces comprise the following services: ▷ Roadside Assistance. ▷ Teleservice Call. ▷ Automatic Teleservice Call. ▷ Teleservice Report. ▷ Teleservice Battery Guard. ▷ Your dealer’s service center. 29 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Cockpit AT A GLANCE Cockpit Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. In the vicinity of the steering wheel 1 Rear window safety switch 79 Bad weather light 141 2 Power windows 78 3 Exterior mirror operation 90 Light switch 138 4 Central locking system Unlocking 65 Lights off Daytime running lights 140 Locking 65 Parking lights 138 5 Lights 30 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Cockpit Low beams 138 10 Automatic headlight control 139 AT A GLANCE Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 100 Auto Start/Stop function 101 Cornering light 140 High-beam Assistant 140 Instrument lighting 141 11 Steering wheel buttons, right Entertainment source 6 Steering column stalk, left Volume Turn signal 105 Voice control 42 High beams, headlight flasher 105 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 High-beam Assistant 140 Thumbwheel for selection lists 131 Roadside parking lights 139 12 Horn, entire surface 13 Heated steering wheel 92 Trip computer 131 7 Shift paddles 114 8 Instrument cluster 122 14 Adjusting the steering wheel 92 9 Steering column stalk, right 15 Steering wheel buttons, left Wipers 106 Cruise control on/off 177 Wiper on Canadian models 109 Rain sensor 107 Rain sensor on Canadian mod‐ els 110 Cleaning the windshield 108 Rear window wiper in Canadian models 112 Active Cruise Control on/off 171 Cruise control: to store the speed Pausing, continuing cruise control Rear window wiper 108 Camera-based cruise control: re‐ duce distance Clean the rear window 109 Camera-based cruise control: in‐ crease distance Cruise control rocker switch 31 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Cockpit AT A GLANCE 16 Unlocking the hood 254 17 With automatic tailgate operation: open/close the tailgate 69 In the vicinity of the center console 1 Control Display 34 Controller with buttons 37 2 Ventilation 197 9 Parking brake 104 3 10 Hazard warning system 271 Intelligent Safety 153 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 164 Driving Dynamics Control 168 4 Radio/Multimedia PDC Park Distance Control 180 5 Glove compartment 212 Rearview camera 183 6 Climate control 191 Parking assistant 186 7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 114 HDC Hill Descent Control 166 8 Controller with buttons 36 32 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Cockpit AT A GLANCE In the vicinity of the roofliner 1 Emergency Call, SOS 272 4 Reading lights 142 2 Glass sunroof 79 5 Interior lights 142 3 Indicator light, front-seat passenger airbag 146 33 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 iDrive AT A GLANCE iDrive Vehicle features and options Input and display This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐ tween entering upper and lower case letters, numbers and characters. Letters and numbers Icon Function Change between capital and lower-case letters. Insert blank space. Use voice control. Concept Confirm entry. The iDrive combines the functions of many switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller and, depending on the equipment version, the touchscreen. Safety information Entry comparison When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter entered and letters may be added automatically. Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle. ▷ Only those letters are offered during entry for which data is available. Warning Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐ uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐ tionary. ▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐ tered in all languages that are available in iDrive. Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐ tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function. Function is activated. Function is deactivated. 34 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 iDrive Status information Icon AT A GLANCE Meaning General information USB device. The status field can be found in the upper area of the Control Display. Status information is dis‐ played in the form of symbols. Online Entertainment. Other symbols Radio symbols Icon Apple CarPlay. Icon Meaning Meaning HD Radio station is being received. Check Control message. Satellite radio is switched on. The sound output has been switched off. Telephone symbols Encrypted connection not active. Request for the current vehicle position. Icon Meaning Checking the current vehicle position. Incoming or outgoing call. Missed call. Split screen, split screen display Signal strength of cellular network. Network search. Cellular network is not available. The critical charge state of the mobile phone has been reached. Roaming is active. SMS text message received. Message received. Reminder. The additional information remains visible even when switching to another menu on the split screen. Switching on/off 1. Sending not possible. Contacts are being loaded. Entertainment symbols Icon General information Additional information, for instance information from the trip computer can be displayed in sev‐ eral menus on the right side of the split screen display, referred to as the split screen. Meaning CD/DVD drive. Bluetooth audio. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" Selecting the display The display can be selected in menus which support the split screen function. 1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected. 2. Press the Controller. 3. Select the desired setting. 35 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 iDrive AT A GLANCE Specifying the number of displays Safety information It is possible to specify the number of displays. 1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected. 2. Press the Controller. 3. "Personalize menu" 4. Select the desired setting. 5. Tilt the Controller to the left. NOTICE Objects in the area in the front of the Control Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐ play. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Dis‐ play. Control elements Switching on/off automatically Overview The Control Display is switched on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the Control Display is needed for operation. In certain situations, the Control Display is switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐ eration is performed on the vehicle for several minutes. Switching on/off manually The Control Display can also be switched off manually. 1 Control Display, with touchscreen depending on the equipment version 1. 2 Controller with buttons 2. "Turn off control display" Press the button. Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐ troller to switch it back on again. Control Display General information To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐ structions, refer to page 281. In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, for instance due to intense solar radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐ ditioning, the normal functions are restored. Controller with navigation system General information The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐ rectly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. Operation ▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐ ample. 36 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 iDrive AT A GLANCE Button Function Goes to destination input menu for navigation. Goes to navigation map. Press once: opens the previous dis‐ play. ▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. Press and hold: open the menus used last. Goes to the Options menu. Controller without navigation system General information ▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐ plays, for example. The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐ rectly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. Operation ▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐ ample. Buttons on the Controller Button Function Press once: calls up the main menu. ▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. Press twice: displays all menu items of the main menu. Goes to the Communication menu. Goes to the Media/Radio menu. 37 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 iDrive AT A GLANCE Operating via the Controller Opening the main menu Press the button. ▷ Tilt in two directions to switch between dis‐ plays, for example. The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu. Buttons on the Controller Button Function Adjusting the main menu 1. Press once: calls up the main menu. Press the button twice. All menu items of the main menu are dis‐ played. Press twice: displays all menu items of the main menu. 2. Select a menu item. Goes to the Communication menu. 3. To move the menu item to the desired posi‐ tion, tilt the Controller to the right or left. Goes to the Media/Radio menu. Selecting menu items Press once: opens the previous dis‐ play. Press and hold: open the menus used last. Highlighted menu items can be selected. 1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted. Goes to the Options menu. 38 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 iDrive AT A GLANCE 2. Press the Controller. Entering letters and numbers Dynamic contents Input You can display dynamic contents within the menu items. The contents of the menu items update automatically, e.g., the active destination guidance in the navigation. 1. Turn the Controller: select letter or number. Via iDrive: : confirm entry. Deleting Icon Function 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Contents of main menu" Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, for instance "iDrive settings", a new display appears. ▷ Tilt the Controller to the left. The current display closes and the previous display is shown. ▷ 2. Press the button. The previous display re-opens. ▷ Tilt the Controller to the right. The new display opens. An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened. Opening recently used menus Press and hold this button. Press the Controller: delete letter or number. Hold the Controller down: delete all let‐ ters or numbers. Using alphabetical lists For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, the letters for which there is an entry are dis‐ played at the left edge. 1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly. All letters for which there are entries are dis‐ played on the left edge. 2. Select the first letter of the desired entry. The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐ played. Operation via touchscreen The recently used menus are displayed. General information Going to the Options menu Depending on the equipment version, the Con‐ trol Display is equipped with a touchscreen. Press the button. Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not use any objects. The "Options" menu is displayed. The menu consists of various areas, for instance: ▷ "Split screen": screen settings. Opening the main menu Tap on the icon. ▷ "Media/Radio": control options for the se‐ lected main menu. ▷ "Save station": if applicable, further control options for the selected menu. 39 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 iDrive AT A GLANCE Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, a new display opens. An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened. ▷ Swipe to the left. ▷ Tap arrow. The new display opens. The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu. Adjusting the main menu Tap on the icon. 1. All menu items of the main menu are dis‐ played. 2. Drag the menu item to the desired position on the right or left. Selecting menu items Tap the desired menu item. Entering letters and numbers Input 1. Tap the icon on the touchscreen. A keyboard is displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. 2. Enter desired letters and numbers. Deleting Icon Function Tapping the icon: deletes the letter or number. Tapping and holding the icon all letters: deletes all letters or numbers. Operating navigation map The navigation map can be moved using the touchscreen. Dynamic contents You can display dynamic contents within the menu items. The contents of the menu items update automatically, e.g., the active destination guidance in the navigation. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Contents of main menu" Function Operation Enlarge/shrink map. Drag in or out with the fin‐ gers. Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ 40 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 iDrive AT A GLANCE rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐ tinations, phone numbers and menu entries. Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used. Storing a function 1. Select function via iDrive. 2. Press and hold the desired button until a signal sounds. Executing a function Press the button. The function will work immediately. This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected. Displaying the key assignment Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The assignment of the buttons is displayed in the upper area of the Control Display. Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for ap‐ prox. 5 seconds. 2. "OK" 41 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 AT A GLANCE Voice activation system Voice activation system Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. Using the voice activation system Activating the voice control system 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 2. Wait for the signal. Concept 3. Say the command. This icon indicates that the voice control system is active. Most functions displayed on the Control Display can be operated by voice commands via the voice activation system. The system supports you with announcements during input. No other commands may be available. In this case, operate the function via iDrive. General information Terminating the voice control system ▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐ hicle is stationary can only be operated via the voice activation system to a limited ex‐ tent. ▷ The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side. ▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal in‐ structions to use with the voice activation system. Functional requirements ▷ A language must be set via iDrive that is sup‐ ported by the voice activation system. To set the language, refer to page 46. Press the button on the steering wheel or ›Cancel‹. Possible commands General information Most menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands. Commands from other menus can also be spo‐ ken. You can also select list entries such as phone list entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐ tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the re‐ spective list. 42 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Voice activation system Displaying possible commands The following is displayed in the top area of the Control Display: ▷ Some possible commands for the current menu. ▷ Some possible commands from other me‐ nus. ▷ Status of the voice recognition. ▷ Encrypted connection is not available. Settings Setting the voice control You can set the system to use standard dialog or a short version. The short version of the voice control plays back short messages in abbreviated form. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Example: going to the sound settings 2. "iDrive settings" The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the Controller. 4. "Speech mode:" 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if needed. 2. Press the button on the steering wheel. 3. ›Media and radio‹ 4. ›Tone‹ AT A GLANCE 3. "Language" 5. Select the desired setting. Speaking during voice output It is possible to answer during inquiries of the voice activation system. The function can be de‐ activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐ rupted, for instance due to background noise or conversations in the vehicle. Via iDrive: Help on the voice activation system 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: have information on the operating principle of the voice activa‐ tion system read out loud. 3. "Language" ▷ ›Help‹: have help for the current menu read out loud. Information for Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tele‐ phone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 272, close to the interior mirror. 2. "iDrive settings" 4. "Speaking during voice output" Online speech processing Online speech processing provides a dictation function, a natural method of destinations input and improves the quality of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is transmitted to a service provider via an encrypted connection and stored locally there. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Language" 4. "Server speech recognition" 43 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Voice activation system AT A GLANCE Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐ structions until the desired volume is set. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐ ume of other audio sources is changed. Voice assistants from thirdparty providers Concept ▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile currently used. Some third-party providers provide digital voice assistants. Supported voice assistants can be used in the vehicle. System limits General information ▷ Certain noises can be detected and may lead to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof closed. ▷ Noises from the front passenger or the rear seat bench can impair the system. Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking. ▷ Major language dialects can cause problems with the voice recognition feature. Speak loud and clear. Using the voice activation system of the smartphone A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be used via voice control. Activate voice command response on the smart‐ phone for this purpose. 1. Press and hold the button on the steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. Voice command response is activated on the smartphone. 2. Release the button. If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐ pears on the Control Display. Some of the functions are limited in the vehicle to prevent any impairment of safety while driving. Functional requirements ▷ Connected Voice Services purchased via ConnectedDrive Store. ▷ Same ConnectedDrive account used in the vehicle and in the BMW Connected app. ▷ Vehicle added in the BMW Connected app. ▷ Third-party account and BMW account are linked in the BMW Connected app. ▷ Smartphone connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth. Activation in the BMW Connected app Third-party assistants are set up in the BMW Connected app. Follow the instructions in the app. Activation in the vehicle An authorization for the use of the voice assistant is required every time before starting a trip. 1. Authorizing voice assistants from third-party providers: ▷ Connect the smartphone to the vehicle via Bluetooth. If it was not possible to activate voice command response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears on the Control Display. 44 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Voice activation system AT A GLANCE ▷ Selects appropriate driver profile, refer to page 72. 2. Press the button on the steering wheel. 3. Wait for the signal. 4. Say the specific activation word of the thirdparty provider and the desired command. Information about the active function is dis‐ played on the Control Display. Malfunction In case of a malfunction, switch off the engine and start the engine again. 45 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 General settings AT A GLANCE General settings Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Setting the time Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Time:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed. 6. Press the Controller. Language 7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes are displayed. Setting the language 8. Press the Controller. Via iDrive: Setting the time format 1. "My Vehicle" Via iDrive: 2. "iDrive settings" 1. "My Vehicle" 3. If necessary, "Language" 2. "iDrive settings" 4. "Language:" 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Time Setting the time zone Via iDrive: 3. "Date and time" 4. "Time format:" 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Automatic time setting Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are updated automatically. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" Via iDrive: 3. "Date and time" 1. "My Vehicle" 4. "Time zone:" 5. Select the desired setting. 2. "iDrive settings" 46 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 General settings AT A GLANCE 3. "Date and time" 3. "Units" 4. "Automatic time setting" 4. Select the desired menu item. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. 5. Select the desired setting. Date The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Activating/deactivating the display of the current vehicle position Setting the date Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" Concept 3. "Date and time" If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐ tomer portal. 4. "Date:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is displayed. 6. Press the Controller. 7. Make the settings for the month and year. Activating/deactivating Via iDrive: Setting the date format 1. "My Vehicle" Via iDrive: 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Data privacy" 1. "My Vehicle" 4. "Vehicle tracking" 2. "iDrive settings" 5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Date and time" 4. "Date format:" 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Setting the units of measurement You can set the units of measurement for some values, for example, consumption, distances and temperature. Activating/deactivating pop-ups For some functions, pop-ups are displayed auto‐ matically on the Control Display. Some of these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Pop-ups" Via iDrive: 4. Select the desired setting. 1. "My Vehicle" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. 2. "iDrive settings" 47 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 General settings AT A GLANCE Control Display 3. Select the desired menu and the desired content. Brightness The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Messages 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Displays" Concept 4. "Control display" 5. "Brightness at night" The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐ ing in the vehicle in list form. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ ness is set. General information 7. Press the Controller. The following messages can be displayed: The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. ▷ Traffic messages. Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ness settings may not be clearly visible. Screensaver If no settings are made via iDrive, a screensaver will be displayed after an adjustable time. Via iDrive: ▷ Communication messages, for example emails, SMS text messages or reminders. ▷ Messages from, e.g., the Concierge service or the BMW Connected app. ▷ Check Control messages. ▷ Messages on service notifications. ▷ Messages from the vehicle manufacturer. Messages are additionally displayed in the status field. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Displays" Retrieving messages 4. "Control display" Via iDrive: 5. "Screensaver" 1. "Notifications" 6. Select the desired setting. 2. Select the desired notification. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. The menu in which the notification is displayed will open. Selecting the contents of the main menu You can select the displayed contents for some menu items in the main menu. 1. Press the button. 2. "Contents of main menu" Deleting messages All messages, except Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can be deleted from the list. Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as they are relevant. Via iDrive: 48 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 General settings AT A GLANCE 1. "Notifications" 3. "Data privacy" 2. Select the desired message. 4. Select the desired setting. 3. Deleting personal data in the vehicle Press the button. 4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all notifications" Settings The following settings can be adjusted: ▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐ sages will be permitted. ▷ Sort the messages according to date or prior‐ ity. Concept Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐ sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This personal data can be permanently deleted using iDrive. General information Via iDrive: Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐ lowing data can be deleted: 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Driver profile settings. 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Stored radio stations. 3. "Notifications" ▷ Stored programmable memory buttons. 4. Select the desired setting. ▷ Travel and trip computer information. ▷ Music collection. Data protection ▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations. Data transfer ▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies. Concept ▷ Login accounts. The vehicle offers different functions, whose use requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐ vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for some functions. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes. ▷ Office data, for instance voice memos. General information With data transfer deactivated, the respective function cannot be used. Only make these settings while stationary. Activating/deactivating Follow the instructions on the Control Display. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Phone book. Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary. Deleting data Note and follow the instructions on the Control Display. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Data privacy" 4. "Delete personal data" 49 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 General settings AT A GLANCE 5. "Delete personal data" Function Connec‐ tion type 7. Exit and lock the vehicle. USB storage device: USB. The deletion process takes 15 minutes to com‐ plete. Exporting and importing driver profiles. If not all data was deleted, repeat the deletion. Performing software updates. Canceling deletion Exporting and importing stored trips. 6. "OK" Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data. Playing music. Connections Playing videos from the smart‐ phone or the USB device. USB. Concept Using Apple CarPlay apps via iDrive and voice operation. Bluetooth and WLAN. Various connection types are available for using mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection type to select depends on the mobile device and the desired function. The following overview shows possible functions and the suitable connection types for them. The scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐ vice. Connec‐ tion type Making calls via the hands-free system. ▷ Bluetooth. ▷ Apple CarPlay. General information Function The following connection types require one-time pairing with the vehicle: Bluetooth. Using phone functions via iDrive. Using the smartphone Office functions. Playing music from the smart‐ phone or the audio player. Bluetooth or USB. Using compatible apps via iDrive. Bluetooth or USB. Paired devices are automatically recognized later on and connected to the vehicle. Safety information Warning Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐ uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐ tionary. Compatible devices General information Information on mobile devices compatible with the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/ bluetooth. 50 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 General settings AT A GLANCE Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed or deviating software versions. Activating/deactivating telephone functions Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number To use all supported functions of a mobile phone, the following functions must be activated prior to pairing. When looking for compatible devices, you may have to state the vehicle identification number and the software part number. These numbers can be displayed in the vehicle. 1. "My Vehicle" Via iDrive: 3. "Mobile devices" 1. "My Vehicle" 4. "Settings" 2. "iDrive settings" 5. Select the desired setting, e.g.: Via iDrive: 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ "Office" 3. "Mobile devices" Activate function to transmit short mes‐ sages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, memos, and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can be incurred by transmitting all data to the vehicle. 4. "Settings" 5. "Bluetooth® info" 6. "System information" A software update, refer to page 55, can be performed, if needed. ▷ "Contact images" Activate function to show the contact pic‐ tures. Bluetooth connection Functional requirements ▷ "Apple CarPlay" Activate the function to use Apple Car‐ Play. ▷ Compatible device, refer to page 50, with Bluetooth interface. ▷ The vehicle key is in the vehicle. ▷ The device is ready for operation. ▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in the vehicle, refer to page 51. ▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may be required on the device; refer to the own‐ er's manual of the device. Switching on Bluetooth Via iDrive: Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Connect new device" 5. Select the functions for which the device will be used: 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ "Telephone" 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ "Bluetooth® audio" 3. "Mobile devices" ▷ "Apps" 4. "Settings" ▷ "Apple CarPlay" 5. "Bluetooth®" The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display. 51 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 General settings AT A GLANCE 6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile device display. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle. 7. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number must be entered. ▷ Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device. Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display. ▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐ ber on the device and via iDrive. The device is connected and displayed in the device list, refer to page 54. Switch the mobile phone off and on again. ▷ Too high or too low ambient temperatures for mobile phone operation. Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme ambient temperatures. Why can telephone functions not be used via iDrive? ▷ The mobile phone may not be properly con‐ figured, for instance as Bluetooth audio de‐ vice. Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐ phone or additional phone function. Why are no or not all telephone book entries dis‐ played or why are they incomplete? ▷ Transmission of the telephone book entries is not yet complete. If connection was not successful: Frequently Asked Questions, refer to page 52. ▷ It is possible that only the telephone book en‐ tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted. Frequently Asked Questions ▷ It may not be possible to display telephone book entries with special characters. All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ pected. In this case, the following explanations can help: Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected? ▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐ nected to the mobile phone or vehicle. In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections with other devices. Delete all known Bluetooth connections from the device list on the mobile phone and start a new device search. ▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or has only a limited remaining battery life. Charge the mobile phone. Why does the mobile phone no longer react? ▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts from social networks. ▷ The number of telephone book entries to be stored is too high. ▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐ stance due to stored information such as memos. Reduce the data volume of the contact. ▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as audio source or as telephone. Configure the mobile phone and connect it with the telephone or additional phone func‐ tion. How can the telephone connection quality be improved? ▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone. ▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not function anymore. 52 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 General settings AT A GLANCE ▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter or place it in the area of the center console. ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable. ▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless charging tray. ▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately. ▷ Due to the large number of USB devices available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐ teed that every device is operable on the ve‐ hicle. If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, contact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop. ▷ Do not expose USB devices to extreme envi‐ ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐ peratures; refer to the owner's manual of the device. USB connection General information The following mobile devices can be connected to the USB port: ▷ Mobile phones. The snap-in adapter features a separate USB port that is automatically connected when a compatible mobile phone is inserted. ▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance MP3 players. ▷ USB storage devices. Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats. ▷ Protect the USB device against mechanical damage. ▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐ niques, proper playback of the media stored on the USB device cannot be guaranteed in all cases. ▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB device via the on‐ board socket, when it is connected to the USB port. ▷ Depending on how the USB device is being used, settings may be required on the USB storage device, refer to the owner's manual of the device. Not compatible USB devices: ▷ USB hard drives. ▷ USB hubs. A connected USB device will be supplied with charge current via the USB port if the device supports this. Follow the maximum charge cur‐ rent of the USB port. ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots. The following uses are possible on USB ports with data transfer: Functional requirement ▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, refer to page 72. ▷ HFS-formatted USB devices. ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps. Compatible device, refer to page 50, with USB port. ▷ Playing music files via USB audio. Connecting the device ▷ Playing videos via USB video. Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter cable to a USB port, refer to page 203. ▷ Loading of software updates, refer to page 55. Follow the following when connecting: The USB device is displayed in the device list, refer to page 54. ▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐ tor into the USB port. 53 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 General settings AT A GLANCE Apple CarPlay preparation Concept CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and iDrive. Functional requirements ▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 50. iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. ▷ Corresponding mobile contract. ▷ Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice operation are activated on the iPhone. ▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must be activated on the iPhone. ▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: Apple CarPlay preparation. Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Via iDrive: Frequently Asked Questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ pected. In this case, the following explanations can help: The iPhone has already been paired with Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is established, CarPlay can no longer be selected. ▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device list. ▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned from the list of stored vehicles under Blue‐ tooth and under WLAN. ▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device. If the steps listed have been carried out and the required function is still not available: contact the hotline, a dealer's service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop. Managing mobile devices 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" General information 3. "Mobile devices" ▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐ matically recognized and reconnected when the ignition is switched on. 4. "Settings" 5. Select the following settings: ▷ "Bluetooth®" ▷ "Apple CarPlay" Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay Pair the iPhone with the vehicle via Bluetooth, re‐ fer to page 51. Select CarPlay as the function: "Apple CarPlay" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐ played in the device list, refer to page 54. ▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle after recognition. ▷ For some devices, certain settings may be necessary, for instance authorization, see owner's manual of the device. Displaying the device list All devices paired or connected with the vehicle are displayed in the device list. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Operation For more information, refer to the Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication. 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 54 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 General settings A icon indicates, for which function a device is used. Icon Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Function 2. "iDrive settings" "Telephone" 3. "Mobile devices" "Additional telephone" 4. Select device. "Bluetooth® audio" "Apps" "Apple CarPlay" 5. "Connect device" The functions that were assigned to the device before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. The functions may be deactivated on a device already connected. Configuring the device Deleting the device Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices. Via iDrive: Via iDrive: AT A GLANCE 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Mobile devices" 2. "iDrive settings" 4. Select device. 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select the desired device. 5. "Delete device" 5. Select the desired setting. The device is disconnected and removed from the device list. If a function is assigned to a device, the function will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐ vice that is already connected and the device will be disconnected. Swapping the telephone and additional telephone Disconnecting the device If two mobile phones are connected to the vehi‐ cle, the functions of the telephone and additional telephone can be switched. The device's connection to the vehicle is discon‐ nected. Via iDrive: The device remains paired and can be con‐ nected again, refer to page 55. 2. "iDrive settings" 1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Mobile devices" Via iDrive: 4. "Settings" 1. "My Vehicle" 5. "Swap telephone/additional tel." 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Mobile devices" Software update 4. Select device. 5. "Disconnect device" General information Connecting the device The vehicle supports a large number of mobile devices, for example mobile phones and MP3 players. Software updates are available for many A disconnected device can be reconnected. 55 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 AT A GLANCE General settings of the supported devices. The vehicle is kept upto-date via regular vehicle software updates. The software may only be restored when the ve‐ hicle is stationary. Updates and related current information is availa‐ ble at www.bmw.com/update. Via iDrive: Displaying the version of the installed software 2. "iDrive settings" The software version installed in the vehicle is displayed. 4. "Restore software" Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Software update" 5. ▷ "Previous version" The previous software version is restored. ▷ "Default software settings" 1. "My Vehicle" The first software version is restored. 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Software update" 6. "Remove software" 4. "Show current version" 7. "OK" If an update has been carried out before, select the desired version to display additional informa‐ tion. 8. Wait for restore. 9. Confirm system restart. Updating software via USB The software may only be updated when the ve‐ hicle is stationary. Via iDrive: 1. Store the file for the software update in the main folder of a USB device. 2. Connect the USB stick at a USB port, refer to page 203. 3. "My Vehicle" 4. "iDrive settings" 5. "Software update" 6. "Update software" 7. "USB" 8. "Install software" 9. "OK" 10. Wait for the update to complete. 11. Confirm system restart. Restoring the software version You can restore the software to the version prior to the last update or to its factory settings. 56 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media Vehicle features and options Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Concept The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐ scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐ cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. Selecting the Owner's Manual 1. Press the button. General information 2. "My Vehicle" You can use the following media formats to call up the content in the Owner's Manual: 4. Select the desired method of accessing the contents. ▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 57. ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, re‐ fer to page 57. Printed Owner's Manual Concept The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐ ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐ fered with the series. General information 3. "Owner's Manual" Scrolling through the Owner's Manual Turn the Controller, until the next or previous contents are displayed. Context help General information The section of the Owner's Manual relating to the function that is currently selected can be dis‐ played directly. Opening via iDrive The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment, and Communication can be obtained as a printed book from the service center. Change directly to the Options menu from the function on the Control Display: Supplementary Owner's Manuals 1. Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition to the onboard lit‐ erature. Press the button. 2. "Owner's Manual" 57 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: "Owner's Manual" Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To switch from a function, for instance radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays: 1. Press the button. 2. "Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual. 4. Press the button again to return to the last displayed function. 5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. To alternate continuously between the last dis‐ played function and the last displayed page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time. 58 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE 59 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS Opening and closing Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Safety Instructions Warning The vehicle key has a button cell battery. Bat‐ teries or button cells can be swallowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries within two hours, for example, due to internal burns or chemical burns. There is an injury hazard or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key and batteries out of reach for children. Immediately seek medical help if there is any suspicion that a battery or button cell has been swallowed or is located in any part of the body. Vehicle key General information The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle keys with integrated key. Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 63. Depending on the equipment and country ver‐ sion, various settings, refer to page 74, can be configured for the button functions. A personal driver profile, refer to page 72, for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle. To provide information on maintenance recom‐ mendations, the service data is stored in the ve‐ hicle key, refer to page 262. To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting the vehicle. Warning People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside. Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. 60 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle. CONTROLS must be activated in the settings, refer to page 74. ▷ The interior lights, refer to page 142, are switched on, unless they were manually switched off. ▷ Depending on the settings, the welcome light and pathway lighting, refer to page 139, are switched on. Overview ▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient closing are folded open. ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 76, is switched off. The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness. Convenient opening 1 Unlocking Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ cle key after unlocking. 2 Locking 3 Unlocking the tailgate With automatic tailgate operation: open the tailgate 4 Panic mode The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed. Locking Unlocking Press the button on the vehicle key. 1. Close the driver's door. 2. Depending on the settings, refer to page 74, the following access points are unlocked: ▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap. Press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points. ▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap. In addition, the following functions are executed: ▷ Unlocking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 74. ▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, refer to page 72, are applied. Press the button on the vehicle key. The following functions are executed: ▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are locked. ▷ Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 74. ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 76, is switched on. If the engine or ignition is still switched on when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button. ▷ The driver's seat is set to the last position saved in the driver's profile. This function 61 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS With Comfort Access: convenient closing Safety information To switch off the alarm: press any button. Tailgate General information Warning With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing. Closing Press and hold the button on the vehicle key in the area close to the vehicle. The windows and the glass sunroof are closed, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed. The exterior mirrors are folded in. To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 74. Safety information Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning flashers are switched on. Switching on interior lights and courtesy light Press the button on the vehicle key with the vehicle locked. This function is not available, if the interior lights were switched off manually. The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness. After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing the button again. Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐ self in a dangerous situation. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds. ▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession. Warning The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing. NOTICE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the win‐ dows. Opening Press the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second. Without automatic tailgate operation: 62 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐ ward. With automatic tailgate operation: The tailgate opens automatically. Replacing the battery NOTE Improper batteries in the vehicle key can dam‐ age the vehicle key. There is a danger of dam‐ age to property. Always replace the discharged battery with a battery with the same voltage, the same size and the same specification. 1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle key, refer to page 65. 2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐ tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the cover with a lever movement of the integrated key, arrow 2. CONTROLS 5. Press the cover closed. 6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key until it engages. Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐ er’s service center or another qualified service center or specialist workshop or take them to a collection point. Additional vehicle keys Additional vehicle keys are available from a serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Loss of vehicle keys A lost vehicle key can be blocked and replaced by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Malfunction General information A Check Control message is displayed. Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐ function under the following circumstances: ▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 63. 3. Push battery in arrow direction using a pointed object and lift it out. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power. ▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐ jects. Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ rect proximity to the vehicle key. Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity to other electronic devices. 4. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with the positive side facing up. ▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐ ing process of mobile devices, for instance charging of a mobile phone. 63 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS ▷ The vehicle key is in direct proximity of the wireless charging tray. Place the vehicle key in a different location. In the case of interference, the vehicle can be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key, refer to page 64. Starting the engine via emergency detection of the Vehicle key ▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center. An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is required. Integrated key General information The driver's door can be locked and unlocked without the vehicle key using the integrated key. Safety information Warning Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge. It is not possible to start the engine if the vehicle key has not been detected. Proceed as follows in this case: 1. Hold the vehicle key with its tip against the marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐ tention to the display in the instrument clus‐ ter. 2. If the vehicle key is detected: Start the engine within 10 seconds. If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly change the position of the vehicle key and repeat the procedure. Frequently Asked Questions What precautions can be taken to be able to open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in ve‐ hicle key? Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it. NOTICE The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty, among other potential damage. Remove the integrated key before pulling the external door handle. ▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐ ices of the BMW app include the ability to lock and unlock a vehicle. This requires an active BMW Connected‐ Drive contract and the BMW app must be in‐ stalled on a smartphone. 64 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS Buttons for the central locking system Removing General information In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐ tem and interior lights come on. Overview Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2. Locking/unlocking via the door lock 1. Remove lid on the door lock. To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening from below and remove the lid. Buttons for the central locking system. Locking Press the button with the front doors closed. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. 2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key. The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside. Alarm system The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐ cle is locked with the integrated key. The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the door lock. The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking. Unlocking Press the button. Opening ▷ Press button to unlock the doors to‐ gether, and then pull the door handle above the armrest. ▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked. 65 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS ▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on the door to be opened; the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked. Unlocking Comfort Access Concept The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key. Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient. The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐ rior. Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front passenger door completely. This corresponds to pressing the button the vehicle key. on Locking General information Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions: ▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle. ▷ Convenient closing. ▷ Open the tailgate. ▷ Opening/closing the tailgate with no-touch activation. Functional requirements ▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be outside of the vehicle near the doors. ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds. Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐ er's or front passenger door with your finger for approx. 1 second without grasping the door han‐ dle. This corresponds to pressing the button the vehicle key. on Convenient closing Safety information Warning With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing. 66 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS Closing Warning The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing. NOTICE Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐ er's or front passenger door, arrow, with your fin‐ ger and hold it there without grasping the door handle. This corresponds with pressing and holding the button on the vehicle key. In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof close. The exterior mirrors fold in, de‐ pending on the model. Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the win‐ dows. Opening Opening the tailgate General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access, locked doors are not unlocked. Press button next on tailgate. This corresponds to pressing the button on the vehicle key. Safety information Without automatic tailgate operation: Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing. The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐ ward. With automatic tailgate operation: The tailgate opens automatically. 67 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Opening and closing With automatic tailgate operation: opening and closing the tailgate with no-touch activation Concept The tailgate can be opened and closed with notouch activation using the vehicle key you are carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot motion in the central rear area and the tail‐ gate is opened or closed. Warning The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing. Settings 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" General information 4. "Tailgate" To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. 5. Select the desired setting: If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the tail‐ gate may open or close inadvertently if you unin‐ tentionally move your foot or if a foot movement is detected. The sensor has an approximate range of 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐ cle. If the tailgate is opened with no-touch activation, locked doors are not unlocked. Contactless opening and closing of the tailgate must be activated in the settings. Safety information Warning ▷ "Open by foot movement" Contactless opening of the tailgate is switched on or off. ▷ "Close by foot movement" Contactless closing of the tailgate is switched on or off. Performing the foot movement 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐ prox. one arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle. 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction of travel and immediately pull it back. With this movement, the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors. During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐ tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do not touch the vehicle. Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing. Opening Perform the foot movement described earlier. 68 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing Before the opening, the hazard warning system flashes. If touchless closing is switched on: Moving a foot again will stop the opening proc‐ ess The subsequent foot movement will close the tailgate again. Closing Perform the foot movement described earlier. Before closing, the hazard warning system flashes and an acoustic signal sounds. Moving a foot again will stop the closing process. The subsequent foot movement will open the tailgate again. System limits The detection of the foot movement may be lim‐ ited due to the following external conditions: ▷ Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle. ▷ Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle. Movement in the range of the sensors may cause unintended opening or closing of the cargo area, for instance due to water running own when cleaning the vehicle or with heavy rainfall. To prevent such unintended opening or closing of the cargo area in such cases, keep the vehicle key at a sufficient distance from the rear of the vehicle. Malfunction Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐ function under the following circumstances: ▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. Replace the battery, refer to page 63. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power. ▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐ jects. CONTROLS Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ rect proximity to the vehicle key. Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity to other electronic devices. Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking request recognition function on the door han‐ dles. In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or using the integrated key, refer to page 64. Tailgate General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 74. Safety information Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing. Warning The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing. 69 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS With manual transmission: NOTICE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the win‐ dows. With the vehicle stationary, pull the but‐ ton in the storage compartment of the driver's door upwards twice in quick succession. The tailgate is opened slightly and can be swung upward. Closing Without automatic tailgate operation Opening from the outside Grasp the recess grip and pull tailgate down. With automatic tailgate operation ▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or have the vehicle key with you. Press on the top half of the BMW label. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second. Opening Adjusting the opening height You can set how far the tailgate should open. When adjusting the opening height, ensure that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking using the vehicle key, refer to page 62. 1. "My Vehicle" The tailgate is opened slightly and can be swung upward at the folded up BMW badge. 3. "Doors/Key" Opening from the inside 5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired opening height. With Steptronic transmission: 2. "Vehicle settings" 4. "Tailgate" With the vehicle stationary, pull the but‐ ton in the storage compartment of the driver's door upwards. If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P must be engaged first. 70 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS ▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate. From the outside ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate. ▷ By pressing the button on the vehicle key. Pressing again continues the opening mo‐ tion. ▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the stor‐ age compartment. Pulling again continues the opening motion. ▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or have the vehicle key with you. Press on the top half of the BMW label. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second. Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Opening with the vehicle key, refer to page 62. If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens au‐ tomatically to the adjusted opening height. Closing From the outside Press the button on tailgate's exterior. From the inside Press button in the storage compartment of the driver's door and keep it pressed. The vehicle key must be located in the car’s inte‐ rior for this function. An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is closed. From the inside With Steptronic transmission: Pull button in the storage compartment of the driver's door upward. From inside the tailgate Without Comfort Access: If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P must be engaged first. With manual transmission: With the vehicle stationary, pull the but‐ ton in the storage compartment of the driver's door upwards twice in quick succession. If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens au‐ tomatically to the adjusted opening height. Press the button on the inside of the tailgate. Interruption of the opening procedure With Comfort Access: The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ When the vehicle starts moving. 71 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Opening and closing Manual operation Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow and smooth motion. To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly only. Closing occurs automatically. Driver profiles ▷ Press button on the inside of the tailgate, ar‐ row 1. ▷ Press button, arrow 2. The vehicle will be locked after closing the tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for this purpose and the vehicle key must be out‐ side of the vehicle in the area of the tailgate. Interruption of the closing procedure The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement. ▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the tailgate. ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the tailgate. ▷ By releasing the button in the storage com‐ partment of the driver's door. Pulling again and holding continues the closing motion. Malfunction Concept In the driver profiles, individual settings for sev‐ eral drivers can be stored and called up again when required. General information There are three driver profiles with which per‐ sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every vehi‐ cle key has been assigned one of these driver profiles. If the vehicle is unlocked using a vehicle key, the assigned personal driver profile will be activated. All settings stored in the driver profile are auto‐ matically applied. If several drivers use their own vehicle keys, the vehicle will apply the personal settings as it is be‐ ing unlocked. These settings are also restored, if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different vehicle key. Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently activated. If another driver profile is selected via iDrive, the settings stored in it will be applied automatically. The new driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key that is currently in use. Safety information Warning With manual operation of a blocked tailgate, it can release itself unexpectedly from the block‐ age. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not operate the tailgate man‐ ually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a deal‐ er’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. There is an additional guest profile available that is not assigned to any vehicle key. It can be used to apply settings in the vehicle without changing the personal driver profiles. Functional requirements For the system to be able to identify the driver profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐ 72 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing tected vehicle key must be clearly allocated to the driver. This is the case when: ▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own ve‐ hicle key. ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle. ▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the driver's door. Settings The settings, for instance for the following sys‐ tems and functions, are stored in the active pro‐ file. The scope of storable settings depends on country and equipment. ▷ Unlocking and locking. CONTROLS Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile. 4. "OK" ▷ All settings stored in the selected driver pro‐ file are automatically applied. ▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key being used at the time. ▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a dif‐ ferent vehicle key, this driver profile will apply to both vehicle keys. Using a guest profile ▷ Climate control. The guest profile is for individual settings that are stored in none of the three personal driver pro‐ files. ▷ Radio. Via iDrive: ▷ Lights. ▷ Instrument cluster. ▷ Programmable memory buttons. ▷ Volumes, sound. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. "Drive off (guest)" ▷ Control Display. 4. "OK" ▷ Navigation. ▷ PDC Park Distance Control. ▷ Rearview camera. The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not assigned to the vehicle key currently in use. Renaming a driver profile ▷ Head-up Display. ▷ Driving Dynamics Control. ▷ Seat position, exterior mirror position, steer‐ ing wheel position where applicable. Both the positions saved via the seat memory and the last position set are saved. ▷ Intelligent Safety. A personal name can be assigned to the active driver profile to avoid confusion between the driver profiles. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Driver profiles" Profile management Selecting a driver profile Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a different driver profile may be activated. This allows you to call up personal vehicle settings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your own vehicle key. 3. Select driver profile. The driver profile marked with this icon can be renamed. 4. "Change driver profile name" 5. Enter profile name. 6. Select the icon. 73 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS Resetting a driver profile 4. "Import driver profile (USB)" The settings of the driver profile currently in use are reset to their factory settings. 5. Select the driver profile to be imported. Via iDrive: Select USB storage device as needed. Displaying driver profiles during start 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Driver profiles" The driver profiles can be displayed at each startup to select the desired profile. 3. Select driver profile. The driver profile marked with this icon can be reset. 4. "Reset driver profile" Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Driver profiles" 5. "OK" 3. "Show driver profiles at startup" Exporting driver profiles Most settings of the active driver profile can be exported. Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving personal settings, for instance before delivering the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver pro‐ files can be taken into another vehicle. Via iDrive: System limits A clear assignment between the vehicle key and driver may not be possible in the following cases, for example. ▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or her own vehicle key, but another person is driving. ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort Access and has multiple vehicle keys with him or her. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile. The driver profile marked with this icon can be exported. 4. "Export driver profile (USB)" Select the USB storage device, as needed, refer to page 53. Importing driver profiles The existing settings of the active driver profile are overwritten with the settings of the imported driver profile. Via iDrive: ▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked. ▷ Multiple vehicle keys are located outside of the vehicle. Settings General information Depending on the package and country version, various settings are available for the vehicle key functions. These settings are stored for the driver profile, refer to page 72, currently used. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten. The driver profile marked with this icon can be overwritten. 74 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing Unlocking It is not possible to use the tailgate via the vehicle key. Doors Adjusting the last seat and mirror position Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Via iDrive: 2. "Vehicle settings" 1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. CONTROLS "Driver's door" or "All doors" 5. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Driver's door only" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle. ▷ "All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked. Tailgate Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try version, this setting may not be offered. Via iDrive: 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile. The setting can be made for the driver profile marked with this icon. 4. "Last seat position automatic" When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐ tions. The most recent position is independent of the positions saved via the seat memory. Confirmation signals from the vehicle Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. The text next to the icon indicates the current setting. 5. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Tailgate" Depending on your vehicle's optional fea‐ tures, the tailgate is either unlocked or opened. ▷ "Tailgate and door(s)" Depending on your vehicle's optional fea‐ tures, the tailgate is either unlocked or opened and the doors unlocked. ▷ "Tailgate opens after unlocking" The vehicle must be unlocked before the tailgate can be used with the vehicle key. 4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐ tion signals. ▷ "Flash for lock/unlock" Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐ ing by one. ▷ With alarm system: "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock" Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn. Automatic locking Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" ▷ "Button lock" 75 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS 3. "Doors/Key" ▷ Acoustic alarm: 4. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Lock automatically" The vehicle locks automatically after a while if no door is opened after unlocking. ▷ "Lock after starting to drive" The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off. Depending on local regulations, the acoustic alarm may be suppressed. ▷ Visual alarm: By flashing of the hazard warning system and headlights, where required. Do not modify the system to ensure function of the alarm system. Automatic unlocking Switching on/off Via iDrive: The alarm system is switched off or on as soon as the vehicle is unlocked or locked with the ve‐ hicle key or via Comfort Access. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on 3. "Doors/Key" 4. "Unlock at end of trip" After the engine is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is automatically unlocked. The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock. Switching off the alarm, refer to page 77. Alarm system General information When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes: ▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate. ▷ Movements in the vehicle interior. ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, dur‐ ing attempts at stealing a wheel or when tow‐ ing the vehicle. ▷ Disconnected battery voltage. ▷ Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐ nosis. ▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con‐ nected to the socket for the OBD OnboardDiagnosis. For socket for the OBD Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 263. Opening the tailgate with the alarm system switched on The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on. After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐ tored again provided the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once. Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐ self in a dangerous situation. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds. ▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession. To switch off the alarm: press any button. The alarm system signals these changes visually and acoustically: 76 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing Indicator light on the interior mirror CONTROLS Avoiding unintentional alarms General information The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized action occurred. Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ In duplex garages. ▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐ onds: The alarm system is switched on. ▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds: ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at sea or on a trailer. ▷ With animals in the vehicle. ▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐ ing. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐ sor can be switched off in such situations. Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured. Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor When the still open access points are closed, the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐ sor will be switched on. Press the button on the vehicle key within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked. ▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking: The vehicle has not been tampered with. ▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐ til the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered. The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ onds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again. Switching off the alarm ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key. Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed. Interior motion sensor The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly. ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key and switch on the ignition using the emer‐ gency detection of the vehicle key, refer to page 63. ▷ With Comfort Access: When carrying the vehicle key, grasp the driv‐ er's door or front passenger door handle completely. 77 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS Power windows ▷ General information If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the windows are automatically closed except a gap. In the radio-ready state, the windows can con‐ tinue to be operated for an extended period of time. After switching off the radio-ready state, the windows can be operated for approx. one mi‐ nute longer. Press the switch beyond the resistance point. The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Convenient opening with the vehicle key, refer to page 61. Closing ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is being held. Safety information ▷ Warning When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling again stops the motion. Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 66. Jam protection system Overview Concept The jam protection prevents objects or body parts becoming jammed between the door frame and window while a window is being closed. General information If resistance or a blockage is detected while a window is being closed, the closing action is in‐ terrupted. Safety information Power windows Safety switch Warning Opening ▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. Accessories on the windows such as antennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐ jury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows. The window opens while the switch is being held. 78 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing Closing without the jam protection system In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows: 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. The window closes with limited jam protec‐ tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted. 2. CONTROLS Safety information Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing. Overview Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without jam protection. Safety switch General information The safety switch can be used to prevent chil‐ dren, for instance from opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the safety function is switched off automatically. Switching on/off Press the button. The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on. Panoramic glass sunroof General information The glass sunroof is ready for operation when the ignition is switched on. In the event of a severe accident, the glass sun‐ roof is automatically closed. Tilting up and closing the tilted glass sunroof Push switch briefly upward. ▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts and the sun protection opens slightly. ▷ The opened glass sunroof closes until it is in the tilted position. The sun protection does not move. ▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes. Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sun protection separately ▷ Slide switch back to the resist‐ ance point and hold. Holding down the switch opens the sun protection. If the sun protection is already 79 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS fully open, the glass sunroof opens. ▷ Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof closes while the switch is being held. If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro‐ tection closes. ▷ Slide the switch back past the resistance point. The sun protection opens automatically. If the sun protection is already fully open, the glass sunroof opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. ▷ Push the switch forward past the resistance point. The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position, the sun protection closes automati‐ cally. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sun protection together ▷ Briefly press out the switch twice in succession toward the rear past the resistance point. The glass sunroof and sun protection are opening to‐ gether. Convenient opening with the vehicle key, refer to page 61. Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 66. Comfort position In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐ terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐ tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position. Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐ roof fully. Jam protection system General information If a resistance or blockage is detected while the glass sunroof is closing, the closing operation is interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open position, or it is stopped when closing from the tilted position. The glass sunroof opens slightly. Closing from the open position without jam protection If there is an external danger, proceed as follows: 1. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐ cific threshold, closing is interrupted. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. ▷ Briefly press out the switch twice in succes‐ sion toward the front past the resistance point. The glass sunroof and sun protection are closing together. 2. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐ ance point and hold until the glass sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. 80 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS Closing from the raised position without jam protection If there is an external danger, push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it. The glass sunroof closes without jam protection. Initializing after a power interruption General information After a power failure during the opening or clos‐ ing process, the glass sunroof can only be oper‐ ated to a limited extent. The system can be initialized under the following conditions. ▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. ▷ The vehicle will not be moved until the initiali‐ zation is completed. ▷ The engine is running. ▷ The outside temperature is above 41 ℉/5 ℃. During initialization, the glass sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear. Initializing the system Press the switch up and hold it until initialization is complete. Initialization begins within 15 seconds. ▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then closes again. ▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes, then opens and closes again. Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof and sun protection have opened then closed again. 81 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Sitting safely An ideal seat position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the event of an accident, the correct seat posi‐ tion plays an important role. Additionally, follow the following chapters for safe driving: ▷ Seats, refer to page 82. ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 85. ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 87. ▷ Airbags, refer to page 143. Warning With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be en‐ sured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving. Warning There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ ment. Electrically adjustable seats General information The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the profile currently used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the vehicle key, the position is auto‐ matically retrieved if the function, refer to page 75, is activated for this purpose. The current seat position can be stored using the memory function, refer to page 89. Front seats Safety information Warning Seat setting while driving can lead to unex‐ pected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. 82 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Overview Seat tilt 1 Memory function Tilt switch up or down. CONTROLS 2 Backrest width Backrest tilt 3 Lumbar support 4 Backrest tilt 5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt Forward/backward Tilt switch forward or backward. Thigh support Press switch forward or backward. Height Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support. Lumbar support Press switch up or down. The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture. 83 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS ▷ Press the front/rear section of the button: The curvature is increased/ decreased. ▷ Press the upper/lower section of the button: The curvature is shifted up/ down. Switching on Press the button once for each temper‐ ature level. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is activated automati‐ cally with the temperature selected last. Backrest width When ECO PRO is activated, refer to page 224, the heating output is reduced. Concept Switching off Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral support when taking corners. Press and hold the button until the LEDs go out. General information You can change the backrest width by adjusting the side wings of the backrest. Rear seats Adjusting Second row of seats ▷ Press the button forward: backrest width is reduced. ▷ Press the button back: back‐ rest width is increased. Front seat heating Overview Safety information Warning There is a risk of jamming when folding down the center armrest in the rear. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the center armrest is clear during folding down. Warning Unexpected movements of the rear seat back‐ rest while driving may occur due to uninten‐ tional unlocking of the rear seat backrests by the straps. There is a risk of injury. Only use straps for releasing the rear seat backrests. Do not attach objects on the straps. Seat heating 84 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS Safety information Backrest tilt 1. Pull loop to unlock the backrest. Warning 2. Apply or lift weight on the backrest as needed. After the adjustment, move the backrest slightly forward or back to engage it correctly. Safety belts General information The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐ sure occupant safety. However, they can only unfold their protective effect when adjusted cor‐ rectly. Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐ though airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they do not replace safety belts. All belt fastening points are designed to achieve the best possible protective effect of the safety belts with proper use of the safety belts and cor‐ rect seat setting. Follow notes on sitting safely, refer to page 82. The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear seat are intended for the persons sitting on the left and right. The center safety belt buckles of the rear seat are intended for the persons sitting in the middle. Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the ability of the safety belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐ gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐ lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐ ported and secured in designated child restraint systems. Warning The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐ stance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are wearing safety belts correctly. Warning With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐ tective function of the middle safety belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If you are using the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest. Warning The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations: ▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way. ▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified. 85 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐ ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐ tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up mechanism. Middle safety belt in the rear Buckling the safety belt Correct use of safety belts ▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to your body over your lap and shoulders. ▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over your lap. The safety belt may not press on your stomach. ▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects. ▷ Avoid thick clothing. ▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward around your upper body. Buckling the safety belt 1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder and hip to put it on. 2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage audibly. Unbuckling the safety belt 1. Hold the safety belt firmly. 1. Pull the buckle tongues out of the mounts in the roof. 2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt buckle, arrow 1. 3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the belt buckle, arrow 2. Safety belt buckles must audibly click into place. Unbuckling the safety belt 1. Hold the safety belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Use the buckle tongue, arrow 1, to open the second safety belt buckle, arrow 2. 4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in the roofliner. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 86 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS Safety belt reminder for driver's and passenger's seat ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. Display in the instrument cluster ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐ termined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint. The indicator light lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint. ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving. Adjusting the height Front head restraints Safety information Warning Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re‐ straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. ▷ Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats. ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ ports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed. ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up. ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push head restraint down. After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly. Adjusting the height: M sport seat The height of the head restraints cannot be set. Removing: basic seat Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint. Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question. Warning Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐ tective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. 87 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS 1. Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐ ance. 2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely. Warning Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐ tective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. Remove: M sport seat ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. The head restraints cannot be removed. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint. Installing ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐ termined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint. Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint. Rear head restraints ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving. Height Safety information Adjusting Warning Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re‐ straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. ▷ Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats. ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ ports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed. Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint. ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down. ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up. After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly. Folding down the head restraint Only fold the head restraint back if no one will be sitting in the seat in question. 88 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS Safety information Warning Using the memory function while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Ve‐ hicle control could be lost. There is a risk of ac‐ cident. Only retrieve the memory function when the vehicle is stationary. ▷ To the back: press the button, arrow 1, and fold the head restraint back, arrow 2. ▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the front as far as it will go. Make sure that the head restraint engages correctly. Removing The head restraints cannot be removed. Memory function Warning There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ ment. Overview Concept The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ essary, retrieved using the memory function: ▷ Seat position. ▷ Exterior mirror position. ▷ Height of the Head-up Display. General information Different settings can be assigned to two mem‐ ory locations. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow‐ ing settings are not stored: ▷ Backrest width. ▷ Lumbar support. Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position. 3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up. 4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit. The LED goes out. Button was pressed inadvertently: Press the button again. The LED goes out. 89 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS Calling up settings Overview The stored position is called up automatically. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The procedure stops when a seat setting switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed. Once underway, adjustment of the seat position on the driver's side is disabled after a short while. Call up deactivated After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐ tions is deactivated to save battery power. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: ▷ Open or close the door or tailgate. ▷ Press a button on the vehicle key. ▷ Press the Start/Stop button. 1 Adjusting 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Folding in and out Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch. Mirrors Adjusting electrically Exterior mirrors Press the button. General information The mirror on the front passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror. The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the vehicle key, the position is automatically re‐ trieved if the function, refer to page 75, is acti‐ vated for this purpose. The current exterior mirror position can be stored using the memory function, refer to page 89. Safety information Warning Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the traffic behind could be incorrectly estimated, for instance while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci‐ dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder. The mirror movement follows the button movement. Malfunction In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass. Folding in and out NOTICE Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle can be damaged in car washes. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button. Press the button. Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. 90 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ In car washes. CONTROLS Interior mirror, manually dimmable Turn button ▷ On narrow roads. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as needed and when the ignition is switched on. Automatic dimming feature The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐ matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mir‐ ror are used to control this. Turn the button to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror. Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature Concept Overview If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-ly‐ ing obstacles when parking, for instance. Activating 1. slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position. 2. Engage selector lever position R. Photocells are used for control: Deactivating ▷ In the mirror glass. Slide the switch to the passenger's side mirror position. ▷ On the back of the mirror. Functional requirements ▷ Keep the photocells clean. ▷ Do not cover the area between the interior mirror and the windshield. 91 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS Steering wheel Switching on/off Press the button. Safety information ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Warning Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only. Adjusting 1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seat position. 3. Fold the lever back up. Heated steering wheel Overview Heated steering wheel 92 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Transporting children safely CONTROLS Transporting children safely Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. The right place for children Safety information Warning A heated vehicle may result in death to per‐ sons, especially children, or animals. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not leave persons, especially children, or animals unat‐ tended in the vehicle. Warning Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child restraint systems and their components to be‐ come very hot. Persons may sustain burn inju‐ ries when touching the hot components. There is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child re‐ straint system to direct sunlight or cover where necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: Transport children in the rear seat ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. General information ▷ Releasing the parking brake. Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle. Children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported in the rear seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐ signed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, or size. 93 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Transporting children safely Installing child restraint systems Safety information Warning The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐ ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐ cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐ tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems. Children on the front passenger seat General information Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐ activated. For automatic deactivation of frontseat passenger airbags, refer to page 145. General information Pay attention to the specifications of the child re‐ straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐ stalling, and using child restraint systems. Safety information Warning The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐ ited or compromised with incorrect seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐ rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ straints or remove them. Warning Safety information Warning Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the air‐ bags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐ bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. The protective effect of child restraint systems and their fastening systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐ ited or lost. A child cannot be properly re‐ strained in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not use child restraint systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident. If a child restraint system and its fastening sys‐ tem has been damaged or exposed to an acci‐ dent, have these systems checked and re‐ placed by the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 94 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Transporting children safely On the front passenger seat CONTROLS Child seat security Deactivating airbags Warning Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the air‐ bags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐ bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐ tomatically, refer to page 145. Seat position and height After installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and bring it as far up as possible to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐ cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached. Backrest width Adjustable backrest width: before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely. Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position. The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems. Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt strap completely. 2. Secure the child restraint system with the safety belt. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is disabled. Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint system. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐ pletely. In some cases it may be necessary to separate the lower belt attachment. Safety belts, refer to page 86. LATCH child restraint fixing system General information LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children. Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐ mation from the child restraint system manufac‐ turer when installing and using LATCH child re‐ straint fixing systems. 95 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Transporting children safely Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors General information The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses. Safety information Position Icon Meaning The corresponding icon shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Seats equipped with lower an‐ chors are marked with a pair, (2), of LATCH symbols. For vehicles equipped with a middle seat: Warning If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are not correctly engaged, the protective effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing system is lim‐ ited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are securely engaged and that the LATCH child restraint fix‐ ing system fits securely against the backrest. It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the ve‐ hicle safety belt instead for the middle seat. Before installing LATCH child restraint fixing systems Warning The attachment points for child restraint sys‐ tems in the vehicle are intended for attaching child restraint systems only. When other ob‐ jects are mounted, the anchors can be dam‐ aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Attach only child restraint systems at the corresponding attachment points. Pull the safety belt away from the area of the child restraint system. Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐ er's information. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly engaged. 96 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Transporting children safely Child restraint systems with tether strap CONTROLS Routing the retaining strap Safety information Warning If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐ fect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes the upper anchor. 1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Anchor 5 Seat backrest Warning If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective effect of the child restraint system is limited or there is none. In certain situations, for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an accident, the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the rear backrests are locked. Warning The attachment points for child restraint sys‐ tems in the vehicle are intended for attaching child restraint systems only. When other ob‐ jects are mounted, the anchors can be dam‐ aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Attach only child restraint systems at the corresponding attachment points. 6 Upper retaining strap Attaching the upper retaining strap to the anchor 1. Raise the head restraint, if needed. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between or along both sides of the supports of the head restraint to the anchor. 3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between the backrest and the cargo cover. 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor. 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down. 6. Lower and engage head restraint as needed. Anchors The respective icon shows the anchor for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper top tether are marked with this icon. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf. 97 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Transporting children safely Locking the doors and windows in the rear Rear doors Push the locking lever on the rear doors up. The door can now be opened from the outside only. Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver's door. The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on. This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear. 98 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving CONTROLS Driving Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Start/Stop button Concept Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine. Steptronic transmission: the en‐ gine starts with the brake pedal pressed when you press the Start/Stop button. Ignition on Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop button, but do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐ ment cluster light up for a varied length of time. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary elec‐ trical consumers. All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary elec‐ trical consumers. Safety measures The ignition is switched off automatically in the following situations while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is off: ▷ When locking the vehicle, even if the low beams are switched on. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged com‐ pletely, so that the engine can still be started. ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off. ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled with driver's door open and low beams off. ▷ When the front doors are opened if there is no other person sitting in the front seats. The low beams switch to parking lights after some minutes of no use. Steptronic transmission with a tap-operated se‐ lector lever, refer to page 114: when switching off the ignition, the selector lever position P is engaged automatically if the selector lever posi‐ tion R, D or M/S is engaged. Radio-ready state General information In the radio-ready state, certain electrical con‐ sumers remain ready for operation. Activating Ignition off Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever position P, press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the brake. With the engine running, press the Start/Stop button. 99 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving CONTROLS If the engine is not running and the ignition is switched on: the system automatically activates radio-ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on. Radio-ready state remains active if, for instance the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons: ▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. ▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. ▷ When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights. Switching off automatically The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐ cally in the following situations: ▷ If the driver's or front passenger door is opened when exiting the vehicle, with the en‐ gine switched off manually. ▷ If the ignition is switched off manually with the Start/Stop button. ▷ After approx. 8 minutes. ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged com‐ pletely, so that the engine can still be started. Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. NOTICE Repeated attempts to start the vehicle or re‐ peated starting of the vehicle in rapid succes‐ sion can cause the starter to overheat. This also results in unburned or inadequately burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Avoid repeated starting of the vehicle, particularly repeated starting in rapid succession. Starting the engine Gasoline engine Safety information Depending on the motorization, the full drive power may not be available for approximately 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual. DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐ sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐ tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐ closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐ late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐ ficient ventilation. Steptronic transmission Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts. 100 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving Engine stop CONTROLS Steptronic transmission Safety information Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: Switching off the engine 1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the parking brake. 2. Engage selector lever position P. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off. The radio-ready state is switched on. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle. Auto Start/Stop function Concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts automatically for driving off. General information After each engine start using the Start/Stop but‐ ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: ▷ Set the parking brake. The function is activated from speeds of approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Depending on the selected driving mode, the system is automatically activated or deactivated. Engine stop ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. Functional requirements ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. Steptronic transmission: The engine is switched off automatically during a stop under the following conditions: ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position D. ▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stopped. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐ er's door is closed. 101 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving CONTROLS In order to be able to release the brake pedal, en‐ gage the selector lever in position P. The engine remains off. To continue driving depress the brake pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine starts auto‐ matically. The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off. Steptronic transmission: manual engine stop Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try version, the engine can be switched off man‐ ually, if the engine was not switched off automat‐ ically when the vehicle stopped: ▷ Press the brake pedal forcefully again from the current pedal position. ▷ Engage selector lever position P. If all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the en‐ gine switches off. Displays in the instrument cluster The READY display in the tach‐ ometer signals that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready to start the engine automatically. The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic en‐ gine stop have not been met. ▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐ ture. ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐ ing wheel is being turned. ▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation when the automatic climate control is switched on. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ At higher elevations. ▷ The hood is unlocked. ▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated. ▷ The parking assistant is activated. ▷ Stop-and-go traffic. ▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N, M/S or R. ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. Starting the engine The engine starts automatically under the follow‐ ing conditions: ▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the brake pedal. After the engine starts, accelerate as usual. Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐ lowing conditions are met: ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open. Functional limitations ▷ The hood was unlocked. The engine is not switched off automatically in situations such as the following: Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time. ▷ In case of a steep downhill grade. ▷ Outside temperature too low. The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button. ▷ The outside temperature is high and auto‐ matic climate control is running. Functional limitations ▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level. Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐ lowing situations: 102 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving ▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when air conditioning is switched on. ▷ When the steering wheel is turned. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐ tor lever position D to R, N or M/S. CONTROLS Activating/deactivating the system manually Using the button ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐ tor lever position P to N, D, R or M/S. ▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation when the automatic climate control is switched on. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when the heating is switched on. Additional Auto Start/Stop function Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try-specific version, the vehicle features a variety of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The Auto Start/Stop function uses this information to adapt to various traffic situations in a proactive manner. For instance, this applies to the following situa‐ tions: Press the button. ▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. The engine is started during an automatic en‐ gine stop. The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button. ▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐ tivated. ▷ If a situation is detected in which the stopping time is expected to be very short, the engine is not switched off automatically. A message appears on the Control Display, depending on the situation. Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop ▷ If a situation is detected in which the vehicle needs to drive off immediately, the engine is started automatically. Steptronic transmission: 1. Engage selector lever position P. The function may be restricted if the navigation data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐ ample. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, for instance when leaving it. 3. Set the parking brake. Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. Automatic deactivation In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, for instance if no driver is detected. 103 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving CONTROLS Malfunction ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle. Overview Parking brake Concept The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked. Safety information Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: Parking brake Setting With a stationary vehicle Pull the switch. The LED lights up. The indicator light lights up red. The parking brake is set. Depending on the stopping situation, the parking brake is engaged automatically. Steptronic transmission: in some parking situa‐ tions, the parking brake is automatically engaged, when selector lever position P is engaged. In these cases, the parking brake is released auto‐ matically when you leave the selector lever posi‐ tion P. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. While driving ▷ Releasing the parking brake. To use as emergency brake while driving: ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled. 104 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving The indicator light lights up red, a signal sounds and the brake lights light up. A Check Control message is displayed. If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop, the parking brake is engaged. Releasing Releasing manually 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or selector lever position P is set. The LED and indicator light go out. The parking brake is released. Automatic release in cars with Steptronic transmission For automatic release, step on the accelerator pedal. The LED and indicator light go out. The parking brake is automatically released when you step on the accelerator under the fol‐ lowing conditions: 2. CONTROLS Press the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set. It may take several seconds for the brake to be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds associ‐ ated with this process are normal. The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ter goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation. Turn signal, high beams, headlight flasher Turn signal Turn signal in exterior mirror When driving and during operation of the turn signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on the exterior mirror are easy to see. Using turn signals ▷ Engine on. ▷ Gear position engaged. ▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed. Malfunction If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure the vehicle against rolling before exiting. A Check Control message is displayed. Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐ stance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehi‐ cle. After a power failure Re-activating the parking brake 1. Switch on the ignition. Press the lever past the resistance point. Canada: the lever returns into its starting position after actuation. To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance point. Triple turn signal activation Lightly tap the lever up or down. The turn signal flashes three times. The function can be activated or deactivated. 105 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving CONTROLS Wiper system Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" General information 3. "Lighting" Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly. 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. "One-touch turn signal" 6. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the profile currently used. Safety information Warning Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash. Malfunction Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indi‐ cates that a turn signal bulb has failed. High beams, headlight flasher Press the lever forward or pull it backward. If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐ ers are folded in when switching on. NOTICE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ tor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property, among other poten‐ tial damage. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on. Switching on ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on. ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. Press the lever up until the desired position is reached. ▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0. 106 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving ▷ Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi‐ tion 1. ▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2. ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3. When travel is interrupted with the wiper system switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed. Switching off and brief wipe CONTROLS Safety information NOTICE If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes. Activating Press the lever down. ▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position. ▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position. The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released. Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐ tion, arrow 1. Wiping is started. The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start. Interval mode or rain sensor Deactivating Concept Press the lever back into the standard position. The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. General information The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset. 107 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Driving Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor Cleaning the windshield Pull the lever. Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor. Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor. Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor. Windshield and headlight washer system The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ shield and activates the wipers briefly. In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regular intervals when the vehicle's lights are switched on. Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated when‐ ever the ignition is switched on. Rear window wiper Safety information Overview Warning The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐ tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed. NOTICE When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property, among other po‐ tential damage. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty. Switching on Turn the outer switch upward. ▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0. ▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐ tinuous operation. 108 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving CONTROLS Clean the rear window Folding away the wipers Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. ▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released. 2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the wipers stop in a close to vertical position. ▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released. The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low. Fold-away position of the wipers Concept The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield. 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield. General information Important, for instance when changing the wiper blades or for folding away under frosty condi‐ tions. Safety information Warning If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐ ers are folded in when switching on. NOTICE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ tor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property, among other poten‐ tial damage. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on. Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated. 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐ shield. 2. Switch on the ignition. 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for oper‐ ation. Canada: wiper system General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly. 109 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Driving Safety information Switching off and brief wipe Warning If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐ ers are folded in when switching on. Press the lever down. ▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press down twice. NOTICE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ tor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property, among other poten‐ tial damage. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on. ▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed: press down once. ▷ Brief wipe: press down once. The lever automatically returns to its initial posi‐ tion when released. Interval mode or rain sensor Switching on Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. General information Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point. ▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once. ▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point. The lever automatically returns to its initial posi‐ tion when released. The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset. Safety information NOTICE If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes. 110 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving Activating/deactivating CONTROLS Windshield and headlight washer system Safety information Warning Press the button on the wiper lever. Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start. If a journey is interrupted with the rain sensor switched on: if the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically acti‐ vated again. Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐ tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed. NOTICE When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property, among other po‐ tential damage. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty. Cleaning the windshield Pull the lever. Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor. Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor. Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ shield and activates the wipers briefly. In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regular intervals when the vehicle's lights are switched on. Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated when‐ ever the ignition is switched on. 111 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving CONTROLS Rear window wiper Safety information Overview Warning If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐ ers are folded in when switching on. NOTICE Switching on Turn the outer switch upward. ▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0. ▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐ tinuous operation. Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. ▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released. ▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released. The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ tor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property, among other poten‐ tial damage. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on. Folding away the wipers 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. In frosty conditions, make sure that the blades are not frozen to the windshield. 3. Press the wiper lever up past the point of re‐ sistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical po‐ sition. 4. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield. Fold-away position of the wipers Concept The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield. General information Important, for instance when changing the wiper blades or for folding away under frosty condi‐ tions. 112 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving CONTROLS Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated. 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐ shield. 2. Switch on the ignition. 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for oper‐ ation. Warning Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐ tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐ jury or risk of damage to property. Only add washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐ ervoir. NOTICE Washer fluid General information All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐ voir. Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used. Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter. Safety information Warning Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐ tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children. United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container. Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended. Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not add siliconcontaining additives to the washer fluid. NOTICE Mixing different windshield washer concen‐ trates or antifreeze can damage the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not mix dif‐ ferent windshield washer concentrates or anti‐ freeze. Follow the information and mixing ratios provided on the containers. Overview The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐ gine compartment. 113 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving CONTROLS Malfunction The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐ trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐ correct readings at temperatures below +5 ℉/-15 ℃. Transmission with a latching selector lever Steptronic transmission Concept The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐ tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐ sibility of manual shifting, if needed. Safety information Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are selected by moving the selector lever into the re‐ spective selector lever position. The selector lever engages in the selector lever positions. Transmission with a tap-operated selector lever In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. Selector lever version General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, a trans‐ mission with either a latching selector lever or a tap-operated selector lever is installed. The selector lever positions R, N, and D are se‐ lected by tapping the selector lever forward or back. The selector lever automatically returns to the center position when released. The selector lever position P is engaged by pressing the P button on the selector lever or, in certain situations, automatically, refer to page 115. Selector lever positions Gear position D Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐ tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐ tomatically. 114 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving R is reverse Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary. CONTROLS Engaging selector lever positions: with a latching selector lever Neutral N General information The vehicle may be pushed or rolled without drivetrain, for instance in car washes, refer to page 116, in selector lever position N. To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start. Parking position P Functional requirements General information Selector lever position, for instance for parking the vehicle. The selector lever can only be taken out of se‐ lector lever position P if the ignition is on or the engine is running. The transmission blocks the drive wheels in se‐ lector lever position P. Engaging selector lever position D, N, R, or P Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary. With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever posi‐ tion P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be deactivated and the shift command will not be executed. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selec‐ tor lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move. Also set parking brake. Automatic parking position for a transmission with a tap-operated selector lever Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ cally in situations such as the following: ▷ After the engine is switched off when the ve‐ hicle is in the radio-ready state, refer to page 99, or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 99, while selector lever posi‐ tion R, D or M/S is engaged. A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation: ▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐ tion P or R. ▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐ sition P into another selector lever position. 1. To release the selector lever lock: with the brake pedal depressed, press the button on the front of the selector lever. ▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐ gaged. ▷ After the ignition has been switched off while selector lever position N is engaged. 115 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving CONTROLS 2. Move the selector lever into the desired posi‐ tion. 2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐ lector lever lock. Engaging selector lever positions: with a tap-operated selector lever 3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐ tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The selector lever automatically returns to the center position when released. General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start. Functional requirements Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position. Depending on the transmission version, the en‐ gine may have to be running too. Engaging selector lever position P The selection lever position P cannot be changed until all technical requirements are met. Engaging selector lever position D, N, R A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation: ▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐ tion R. Press button P. ▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐ sition P into another selector lever position. Rolling or pushing the vehicle 1. Fasten driver's safety belt. General information In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed. 116 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving Engaging selector lever position N: with a latching selector lever 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. If necessary, release the parking brake. CONTROLS Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. 3. Depress the brake pedal. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐ ance point at the full throttle position. 4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐ lector lever position N. Sport program M/S 5. Release brake. Concept The vehicle can roll. If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. Manually unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 119. The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for a sportier driving style. The transmission, for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are shorter. Activating the Sport program Engaging selector lever position N: with a tap-operated selector lever NOTICE Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ gaged when the ignition is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not switch ignition off in car washes. 1. Start the engine while pressing on the brake pedal. 2. If necessary, release the parking brake. 3. Depress the brake pedal. 4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐ lector lever position N. 5. Switch the engine off. In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check Control message is displayed. The vehicle can roll. Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever po‐ sition P is automatically engaged after approx. 15 minutes. If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance S1. The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ vated. Ending the Sport program Press the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Manual mode M/S Concept Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode. Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 119. 117 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving CONTROLS Activating manual mode ▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control deactivated. 1. Press the selector lever to the left from selec‐ tor lever position D, arrow 1. ▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC activated. In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐ down. M35i: once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode does not upshift automati‐ cally. 2. Press the selector lever forward or pull it backward, arrows 2. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance M1. With the appropriate transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐ neously activating kickdown and operating the left shift paddles. This is not possible by switch‐ ing briefly via the shift paddles from selector lever position D to manual mode M/S. Ending the manual mode Press the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Shift paddles Shifting ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ward. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. The transmission continues shifting automati‐ cally in certain situations, for instance when speed limits are reached. With a tap-operated selector lever: when M2 is set manually while the vehicle is stationary, the transmission will no longer shift back to M1. This shifting behavior is retained until you engage M1 manually or exit M. Steptronic Sport transmission: prevent automatic upshifting in M/S manual mode Once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed. The Steptronic Sport transmission does not au‐ tomatically upshift in M/S manual mode once the maximum speed is reached, if one of the follow‐ ing conditions is met: Concept The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel. General information Shifting The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and road speeds. Short-term manual mode In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐ dle switches into manual mode temporarily. After conservative driving in manual mode with‐ out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode. It is possible to switch into automatic mode as follows: ▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle. 118 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving ▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift pad‐ dle, briefly pull the left shift paddle. CONTROLS 1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve at the bot‐ tom from the center console. Continuous manual mode In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐ dle switches into manual mode permanently. Shifting 2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connector, if needed. 3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehi‐ cle tool kit, refer to page 264, press the yel‐ low release lever downward, arrow. ▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle. ▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle. ▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by pulling and holding the left shift paddle. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the current gear. Displays in the instrument cluster The selector lever position is dis‐ played, for example P. 4. Press the button on the front of the selector lever and move the selector lever back slightly. Release the release lever. 5. Bring the selector lever into the desired posi‐ tion. Releasing the transmission lock manually: with a latching selector lever If the selector lever is locked in selector lever po‐ sition P despite the ignition being switched on, the brake pedal being depressed and the button on the selector lever being pressed, the trans‐ mission lock can be unlocked manually: Before unlocking the transmission lock manually, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing. Releasing the transmission lock electronically: with a tapoperated selector lever General information Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from a danger area. 119 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving CONTROLS Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. Engaging selector lever position N Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the engine. General information The use of Launch Control causes premature component wear since this function represents a very heavy load for the vehicle. Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 216, period. 1. Press and hold down brake pedal. To start with Launch Control, point the front wheels straight forwards. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start. Functional requirements 3. Press the button on the selector lever, ar‐ row 1, and press and hold the selector lever into selector lever position N, arrow N, until selector lever position N is displayed in the in‐ strument cluster. A Check Control message is displayed. Launch Control is available as soon as the engine and transmission are at operating temperature. Depending on the outside temperature and driv‐ ing style, the engine and transmission require an interrupted trip of up to 30 miles/50 km in order to reach the operating temperature needed for Launch Control. Start with launch control While the engine is running: 1. 4. Release the selector lever. Press the button and select SPORT with the Driving Dynamics Control. TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster in combination with SPORT and the DSC OFF indicator light lights up. 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops. 2. Engage selector lever position S. 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its own. 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake. For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing. 4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown. Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch Control A destination flag is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. Concept Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐ rounding conditions. 5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait briefly until the engine speed is constant. Keep accelerator pedal in this position. 6. Release the brake within 3 seconds after the destination flag illuminates. The vehicle accelerates. 120 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving CONTROLS Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the destination flag is displayed and the accelera‐ tor pedal is not released. Repeated use during a trip After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐ mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes before Launch Control can be used again. After using Launch Control To increase driving stability, activate DSC Dy‐ namic Stability Control again. System limits An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode. 121 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Displays Displays Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Overview, instrument cluster 1 Speedometer 5 Electronic displays 2 Messages, for instance Check Control 6 Fuel gauge 126 3 Tachometer 126 7 Reset miles 126 4 Current consumption 122 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays Check Control CONTROLS Airbag system Airbag system and belt tensioner may not be working. Concept The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. General information A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐ bination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a text message may appear on the Control Display. Indicator/warning lights General information The indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐ tioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on. Red lights Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Parking brake The parking brake is set. For releasing the parking brake, refer to page 105. Brake system Braking system impaired. Continue to drive moderately. Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Forward Collision Warning Indicator light illuminates: advance warn‐ ing is issued, for example when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Increase the distance. Safety belt reminder Safety belt on the driver's side is not buckled. For some country versions: pas‐ senger belt is not worn or objects are de‐ tected on the front passenger seat. Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the immi‐ nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐ proaches another vehicle at a relatively high dif‐ ferential speed. Intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu‐ ver. Pedestrian Warning Symbol in the instrument cluster. If a collision with a detected person is im‐ minent, the icon lights up and a signal sounds. 123 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays CONTROLS Orange lights DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated Active Cruise Control The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead. Camera-based cruise control with Stop&Go function, ACC, refer to page 171. DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated. DSC, refer to page 164, and DTC, refer to page 166. Flat Tire Monitor FTM Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you. Indicator light flashes: the conditions are not adequate for the system to work. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until the driver actively resumes control of the vehicle by pressing on the brake pedal or ac‐ celerator pedal. Yellow lights Antilock Braking System ABS The Brake Assistant function may not activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer braking distance into account. Have the system immediately checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. DSC Dynamic Stability Control The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances. The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐ tioned. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. DSC, refer to page 164. The FTM signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Run-flat tires, refer to page 151. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The indicator light illuminates: the Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐ tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐ formation in the Check Control message. The indicator light flashes and is then illuminated continuously: flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot be detected. ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system auto‐ matically becomes active again. ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐ set the system again. ▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to page 146. Steering system Steering system may not be working. 124 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. High-beam Assistant Emissions uation. ▷ The warning light lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ cumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐ ously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter. Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 263. Lane departure warning CONTROLS High-beam Assistant is switched on. High beams are switched on and off au‐ tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐ High-beam Assistant, refer to page 140. Cruise control The system is switched on. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel. Blue lights High beams High beams are switched on. High beams, refer to page 106. Hiding Check Control messages System is switched on and under certain circumstances warns if a detected lane is left without flashing beforehand. Lane departure warning, refer to page 160. Green lights Turn signal Turn signal switched on. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Turn signal, refer to page 105. Parking lights, headlight Parking lights or headlights are switched on. Parking lights/low beams, headlight con‐ trol, refer to page 138. Press the button on the turn signal lever. Continuous display Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐ function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐ cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐ utively. The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐ onds. After this time, they are displayed again automatically. 125 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Displays Temporary display Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐ matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be dis‐ played again later. Displaying stored Check Control messages Fuel gauge An arrow beside the fuel pump icon shows which side of the ve‐ hicle the fuel filler flap is on. Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary. Follow the information on refueling. Via iDrive: The yellow indicator light illuminates, once the fuel reserve is reached. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control" Tachometer 4. Select the text message. Display Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect the engine. Check Control At least one Check Control message is displayed or stored. Text messages Text messages in combination with a icon in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control mes‐ sage and the meaning of the indicator/warning lights. Odometer and trip odometer Display ▷ Odometer, arrow 1. ▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. With urgent messages the added text will be au‐ tomatically displayed on the Control Display. Messages after trip completion Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐ played again after the ignition is switched off. Showing/resetting miles Press the button. ▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time, the outside tem‐ perature and the odometer are displayed. ▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip od‐ ometer is reset. 126 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays Outside temperature CONTROLS Range General information General information If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal sounds. When the remaining range is low: A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ The remaining range is shown on the trip computer. There is an increased risk of ice on roads. Safety information Warning Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃ there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on bridges or shady sections of the road. There is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures. Display The outside temperature is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. ▷ A Check Control message is displayed briefly. ▷ With a sporty driving style, for instance fast cornering, the engine function is not always ensured. The Check Control message appears continu‐ ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. Safety information NOTICE With a driving distance of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Re‐ fuel promptly. Display Time The current range is displayed in the instrument cluster. The time is displayed in the in‐ strument cluster. The time can be set on the Con‐ trol Display. Date Current consumption Instrument cluster The date is displayed in the in‐ strument cluster. The date can be set on the Con‐ trol Display. Displays the current fuel con‐ sumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner. 127 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays CONTROLS Instrument cluster with enhanced features Displays the current fuel con‐ sumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner. Displaying the current consumption General information After the ignition is switched on the instrument cluster briefly displays available driving distance or time to the next scheduled maintenance. A service advisor can read out the current serv‐ ice notifications from your vehicle key. Display Detailed information on service notifications Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the current consumption can also be displayed as bar in the instrument cluster. More information on the type of service required may be displayed on the Control Display. Via iDrive: Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Displays" 3. Tilt the Controller to the left. 4. "Instrument panel" 4. "Service required" Maintenance work and legally mandated in‐ spections are displayed. 5. "Additional indicators" Energy recovery 5. Select an entry to call up detailed information. Symbols Display In coasting overrun mode the ki‐ netic energy of the vehicle is con‐ verted to electrical energy. The vehicle battery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be re‐ Symbols No service is currently required. The time for recommended maintenance or a legally man‐ dated inspection is approaching. duced. Service interval is exceeded. Service notifications Concept The function displays the service notifications and the corresponding maintenance scopes. Description Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐ spections. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. Via iDrive: 128 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays Steptronic transmission: displaying 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Tilt the Controller to the left. "Service required" 4. CONTROLS Example Description Efficient gear is set. 5. "Vehicle inspection" 6. "Date:" 7. Select the desired setting. Shift into efficient gear. Automatic Service Request Data regarding the service status or legally man‐ dated vehicle inspections is automatically trans‐ mitted to your dealer’s service center before your vehicle is due for service. You can check when your dealer’s service center was notified. Via iDrive: Speed Limit Info Concept Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Tilt the Controller to the left. 4. Speed Limit Info "Teleservice Call" Gear shift indicator Concept The system recommends the most efficient gear for the current driving situation. General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try version, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the Steptronic transmission and with manual transmission. Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster. On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐ gaged gear is displayed. General information The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐ tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc., are also detected and compared with the vehicle's on‐ board data, such as from the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation. With the navigation system, the system takes into account the information stored in the naviga‐ tion data and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs. Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐ ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traffic signs with speed limitations are detected and displayed only. Speed limitations due to entering or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. are not dis‐ played. Speed limits with extra text characters are always displayed. 129 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays CONTROLS Safety information With navigation system: Speed Limit Info not available. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Without navigation system: No speed limit or cancellation de‐ tected. Overview Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. Camera System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following sit‐ uations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed by objects, stickers or paint. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. The camera is installed near the interior mirror. ▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc. Display ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the camera. General information ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect. Speed Limit Info is permanently displayed in the instrument cluster. Speed Limit Info The last speed limit detected. Without a navigation system the traffic signals are grayed out after curves or longer stretches of roadway. ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery. ▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected. 130 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays Selection lists CONTROLS Display General information Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fol‐ lowing can be displayed or operated using the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel and via the displays in the instrument clus‐ ter and the Head-up Display: ▷ Current audio source. ▷ Phone redial. ▷ Turn on voice activation system. Activating a list and adjusting the setting Depending on the equipment version, the list in the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐ tration. Trip computer Concept The trip computer displays different vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such as average values. Calling up information on the Info Display On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list. 1. Turn the thumbwheel and select the desired setting. 2. Press the thumbwheel. Press the button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed in the Info Display of the instrument cluster. Pressing the button repeat‐ edly displays additional information. Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐ nal lever calls up the following information in the Info Display: 131 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays CONTROLS Information in detail ▷ Range. ▷ Average consumption, fuel. ▷ Average consumption since delivery from the factory. ▷ Current consumption, fuel. Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km. ▷ Average speed. ▷ Date. ▷ Engine temperature display. Average consumption ▷ Vehicle speed. The average consumption is calculated for the period while the engine is running. ▷ Depending on the equipment, the time of ar‐ rival. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. ▷ Depending on the equipment, the distance to destination. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. ▷ ECO PRO bonus range. Selecting information The average consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the trip computer. Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed. Resetting average values You can select what information from the trip computer is to be displayed on the Info Display of the instrument cluster. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. Select the desired setting. Indication in the Info Display The information from the On‐ board Computer is shown in the Info Display in the instrument cluster. Press and hold the button on the turn signal lever. The average consumption since delivery from the factory cannot be reset. Engine temperature display Concept Depending on the vehicle equipment, the current engine temperature is displayed, based on a combination of the coolant temperature and en‐ gine oil temperature. As soon as the optimum 132 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays operating temperature has been attained, the in‐ dicator is in the center position. General information If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the engine, become too hot, a Check Control message is displayed too. To check the coolant level, refer to page 260. Display CONTROLS General information Two types of trip computers are available on the Control Display: ▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the consumption, are displayed. The values can be reset individually. ▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐ view of a specific route and can be reset as often as necessary. Calling up the trip computer or travel computer Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" Resetting the trip computer Distance to destination Via iDrive: Depending on the vehicle equipment, the dis‐ tance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started. 1. "My Vehicle" The distance to the destination is adopted auto‐ matically. 2. "Driving information" 3. "Onboard info" 4. "Consumption" or "Speed" 5. "OK" Resetting the trip computer Time of arrival Depending on the vehicle equip‐ ment, the estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is en‐ tered in the navigation system be‐ fore the trip is started. The time must be correctly set. Trip computer on the Control Display Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Trip computer" 4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. ▷ ▷ "Reset": all values are reset. "Automatic reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come to a standstill. 5. If necessary, "OK" Concept The trip computer displays different vehicle data on the Control Display, such as average values. 133 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays CONTROLS Sport displays 1. Activate SPORT. 2. "Sport displays" Concept On the Control Display, sport instruments can be displayed, and the vehicle state can be checked before the use of the SPORT program. Speed warning Sport instruments Concept General information The system can be used to set a speed limit. A warning will be issued when this speed limit is exceeded. On the Control Display, values for power and tor‐ que are displayed. General information Displaying sport instruments Via iDrive: The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐ ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐ ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h. 1. "My Vehicle" Adjusting 2. "Technology in action" Via iDrive: 3. "Sports instruments" Via the Driving Dynamics Control 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 1. Activate SPORT. 3. "Speed warning" 2. "Sport displays" 4. "Warning at:" Vehicle state 5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is displayed. General information 6. Press the Controller. The following vehicle and environment data is evaluated: Activating/deactivating ▷ Engine temperature. Via iDrive: ▷ Outside temperature. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure. 2. "Vehicle settings" Tire temperature and tire filling pressure are de‐ termined while driving. 3. "Speed warning" Checking vehicle state Via iDrive: Setting your current speed as the speed warning 1. "My Vehicle" Via iDrive: 2. "Technology in action" 1. "My Vehicle" 3. 2. "Vehicle settings" "Vehicle and surroundings" 4. "Speed warning" Via the Driving Dynamics Control 134 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays CONTROLS 3. "Speed warning" ▷ Driver assistance systems. 4. "Select current speed" Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed. Head-up Display Selecting displays in the Head-up Display Concept Via iDrive: This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed. 1. "My Vehicle" The driver can quickly absorb information and concentrate on the traffic situation. 3. "Displays" Overview 2. "iDrive settings" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Displayed information" 6. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the profile currently used. Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness. The basic setting can be adjusted manually. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Switching on/off 2. "iDrive settings" Via iDrive: 3. "Displays" 1. "My Vehicle" 4. "Head-Up Display" 2. "iDrive settings" 5. "Brightness" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ ness is set. 5. "Head-Up Display" 7. Press the Controller. Display When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐ justed using the instrument lighting. For an overview, Settings are stored for the profile currently used. The following information is displayed on the Head-up Display: Adjusting the height ▷ Vehicle speed. Via iDrive: ▷ Navigation instructions. 1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Check Control messages. 2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. 3. "Displays" 135 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays CONTROLS 4. "Head-Up Display" Special windshield 5. "Height" The windshield is part of the system. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is reached. The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. 7. Press the Controller. A film in the windshield prevents double images from being displayed. Settings are stored for the profile currently used. The height of the Head-up Display can also be stored using the memory function, refer to page 89. For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop, if necessary. Setting the rotation The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐ tated around its own axis. Via iDrive: Vehicle status General information 1. "My Vehicle" The status can be displayed and actions per‐ formed for several systems. 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" Going to the vehicle status 5. "Rotation" Via iDrive: 6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is selected. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" 7. Press the Controller. Settings are stored for the profile currently used. Display visibility Information at a glance Symbols The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐ play is influenced by the following factors: ▷ Seat position. ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display. ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. ▷ Wet roads. ▷ Unfavorable light conditions. If the image is distorted, have the basic settings checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up Display, refer to page 281. Description "Flat Tire Monitor": status of the Flat Tire Monitor FTM, refer to page 151. "Tire Pressure Monitor": status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to page 146. "Engine oil level": Electronic en‐ gine oil level check, refer to page 256. "Check Control": displaying stored Check Control mes‐ sages, refer to page 126. 136 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Displays Symbols CONTROLS Description "Service required": displaying service notifications, refer to page 128. "Teleservice Call": Teleservice Call. 137 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Lights CONTROLS Lights Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Overview Switches in the vehicle Icon Function Lights off. Daytime running lights. Parking lights. Low beams. Instrument lighting. Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights General information Position of switch: , , If the driver's door is opened when the ignition is switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off. Parking lights The light switch element is located next to the steering wheel. Icon Function Bad weather light. The vehicle is illuminated on all sides. Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐ ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and it would then be impossible to start the engine. When parking, switch on the one-sided roadside parking light, refer to page 139. Automatic headlight control. Cornering light and variable light distri‐ bution. Cornering light. Position of switch: Low beams Position of switch: The low beams light up when the ignition is switched on. 138 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Lights Canada: roadside parking light CONTROLS 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. "Welcome lights" Concept The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Switching on Pathway lighting General information The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlight flasher is switched on after the radioready state is switched off. Setting the duration Via iDrive: With radio-ready state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" Switching off 5. "Pathway lighting" Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction. 6. Set length of time. Welcome lights and pathway lighting Welcome lights General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ambient brightness, individual light functions may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is un‐ locked. Activating/deactivating Position of switch: Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" , The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Automatic headlight control Concept The low beams are switched on and off automat‐ ically depending on the ambient brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐ cipitation. General information A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. The low beams always stay on when the fog light is switched on. 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 139 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Lights CONTROLS Activating Position of switch: The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐ luminated when the low beams are switched on. System limits The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐ ing conditions. For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch the lights on manually. Daytime running lights General information Position of switch: , , The daytime running lights light up when the ig‐ nition is switched on. After the ignition is switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐ tion . Activating/deactivating In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ vate the daytime running lights. Via iDrive: In tight curves, for instance on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, cornering light is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed. The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or, where appli‐ cable, the use of turn signals. When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may be automatically switched on regardless of the steering angle. Adaptive headlight range control The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐ ances out acceleration and braking processes as well as the vehicle load conditions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized. High-beam Assistant Concept The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic participants early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depending on the traffic situation. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" General information 3. "Lighting" The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐ uation allows. In the low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system. 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the profile currently used. Cornering light General information The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐ bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities. The high beams can be switched on and off manually at any time. Position of switch: 140 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Lights Activating/deactivating CONTROLS wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings. ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐ ence of highly reflective signs. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc. Position of switch, depending on the vehicle equipment: , Press the button on the turn signal lever. The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ter is illuminated when the low beams are switched on. The headlights are automatically switched be‐ tween low beams and high beams. The blue indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams. The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off, refer to page 106. To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever. Fog lights Bad weather light Concept The bad weather light ensures optimized illumi‐ nation of the roadway in poor visibility, such as fog or rain. The light distribution of the low beams is adapted to the visibility. Functional requirement The automatic headlight control must be acti‐ vated before switching on the bad weather light. Switching on/off Press the button. System limits The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. In situation that require this, therefore switch off manually. Instrument lighting The system is not fully functional in the following situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐ sary: The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to set the brightness. ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation. Adjusting ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and Functional requirement Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel. 141 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Lights CONTROLS Interior lights Ambient light General information Depending on the equipment, the interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy lights are controlled automatically. The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting con‐ trols brightness of some of these features. Overview General information Depending on the equipment version, lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐ rior. Selecting the color scheme Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Lighting design" 6. Select the desired setting. To deactivate the ambient light: "Off". Setting the brightness 1 Interior lights Via iDrive: 2 Reading lights 1. "My Vehicle" Switching the interior lights on/off Press the button. 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Brightness" To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds. 6. Adjust the brightness. Switching the reading lights on/off Press the button. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐ ing lights are located next to the interior lights in the front and rear. 142 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety CONTROLS Safety Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Airbags 1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag 3 Head airbag Front airbags Side airbag Front airbags help protect the driver and the front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ equate protection. In the event of a side impact, the side airbag pro‐ tects the side of the body in the chest and lap area. 143 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Safety Head airbag In the event of a side impact, the head airbag protects the head. Ejection Mitigation The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side im‐ pact events. Knee airbag The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of a frontal impact. Protective effect Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ tion, for instance in less severe accidents or rearend collisions. Information on optimum effect of the airbags Warning If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐ ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protection as intended and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐ gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐ timum protective effect of the airbag system. possible while still maintaining a comfortable grip on the steering wheel. ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag. ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the floor area and does not support them on the dashboard. ▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐ mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐ son. ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐ senger side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐ tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS devices or mobile phones. ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. ▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or other objects to the front passenger seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐ ets, over the backrests. ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats. ▷ Do not remove the airbag system. ▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered. ▷ Adjust seat and steering wheel so that hands can be crossed over the steering wheel. Se‐ lect the settings so that the shoulder rests against the backrest when crossing the hands and the upper body is as far back as Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐ not be fully ruled out in certain situations. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ ing impairment in sensitive occupants. Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐ ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW Customer Relations for further information. Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors. 144 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety Functional readiness of the airbag system CONTROLS Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐ senger's side are activated or deactivated. General information Safety information Warning Individual components can be hot after trigger‐ ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐ jury. Do not touch individual components. Before transporting a child on the front passen‐ ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐ structions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children. Safety information Warning Warning Improperly executed work can lead to failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐ spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐ juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Correct function When the ignition is switched on, the warning light in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner. Airbag system malfunctioning ▷ Warning light does not come on when the ig‐ nition is switched on. ▷ The warning light lights up continuously. Automatic deactivation of the front-seat passenger airbags Concept The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐ ance. To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag function, the system must be able to detect whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐ ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐ senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area. Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain seat positions. In this case, the indica‐ tor light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. In this case, change the seat position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator light goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion. ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat un‐ less they are specifically determined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat. ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐ tem is to be installed on it. 145 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety CONTROLS ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below. ▷ No moisture in or on the seat. Indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbag The explosive power that activates driver's/frontseat passenger airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a respective message appears on the Control Display. Calibrating the front seats Warning The indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags indicates the operating state of the frontseat passenger airbags. The light indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated. ▷ The indicator light lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint sys‐ tem or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated. ▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐ cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐ bags on the front passenger side are acti‐ vated. Detected child restraint systems The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐ straint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐ ter installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐ ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated. There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ ment. A corresponding message appears on the Con‐ trol Display. 1. Press the switch and move the respective seat all the way forward, until it stops. 2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still moves forward slightly. 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disappears. If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration. If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires. 146 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety CONTROLS General information All wheels green Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐ tion pressure and, depending on the model, the tire temperature. System is active and will issue a warning related to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. Further information and instructions on using the system can also be found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 234. One to four yellow wheels Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable message of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset was performed with the correct tire inflation pres‐ sure. ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted to a new value, a reset was performed. ▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics. Status display Current status A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐ sure has occurred in the indicated tires. Gray wheels It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses. Possible causes: ▷ Malfunction. ▷ The system is being reset. Additional information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures and, depending on the model, the tire temperatures. The values shown are instantaneous measurements and may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions. The system status can be displayed on the Con‐ trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐ tive. Resetting the system Via iDrive: Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" The current status is displayed. "Tire Pressure Monitor" 4. Start the engine but do not drive off. 5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset". Tire conditions 6. Drive away. General information Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display. The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐ ing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor…". After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference val‐ ues. The reset is completed automatically while driving. After a successfully completed reset, the wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and 147 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Safety "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for recommended pressures." is displayed. You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically. Messages Measure 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed. 2. Reset the system. If the tire inflation pressure is too low General information A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on. Message A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster. Safety information In addition, a icon with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display. Warning A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐ mation on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires. Icon Possible cause There is a tire inflation pressure loss. No reset was performed for the sys‐ tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. Measure If a tire inflation pressure check is required Message A icon with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display. Icon Possible cause The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done. No reset was performed for the sys‐ tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. Inflation was not carried out according to specifications. 1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. 2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas sta‐ tion, check and correct the tire inflation pres‐ sure in all four tires, if necessary. 3. Reset the system. If there is a significant loss of tire inflation pressure Message A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster. In addition, a icon with the affected tire appears in a Check Control message on the Control Dis‐ play. The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset. 148 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety Icon Possible cause Run-flat tires There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. Safety information No reset was performed for the sys‐ tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ mal tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 242, are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. CONTROLS Warning The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ stance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐ cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Maximum speed You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Continued driving with a flat tire Actions in the event of a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: Normal tires 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 1. Identify the damaged tire. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. To do this, check the air pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the re‐ set. If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐ sible, please contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel. Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the re‐ set. Possible driving distance with a depressurized tire The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, outside temperature. The driving distance may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used. If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐ tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km. 149 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety CONTROLS Vehicle handling with damaged tires Malfunction Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following: The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses. ▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. ▷ Longer braking distances. ▷ Changed self-steering properties. Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes. Final tire failure Examples and recommendations in the following situations: ▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. ▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, for instance an emergency wheel, is mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed. Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. ▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a deal‐ er’s service center or another qualified serv‐ ice center or repair shop. System limits ▷ The system was unable to complete the re‐ set. Perform a system reset again. Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ cate the final failure of a tire. Temperature The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐ tion pressure. The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply. Sudden tire pressure loss The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances. Failure performing a reset The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are cor‐ rect. ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system auto‐ matically becomes active again. Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐ cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐ flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐ hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐ sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐ sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐ ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐ 150 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐ ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐ cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐ mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐ mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐ tect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐ ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐ hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. CONTROLS The system does not measure the actual infla‐ tion pressure in the tires. Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable message of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐ tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐ tion pressure. ▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new value, an initialization was performed. Status display The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" The status is displayed. Initialization required An initialization must be performed in the follow‐ ing situations: ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐ justed. ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement. Performing initialization Flat Tire Monitor FTM Concept The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ tween the individual wheels while driving. In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐ ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire. When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with tire chains. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" 151 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety CONTROLS 4. Start the engine but do not drive off. 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset" 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving continues. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ mal tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 242, are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. Actions in the event of a flat tire Normal tires Messages 1. Identify the damaged tire. General information When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ bility Control is switched on, if needed. Safety information Warning A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐ mation on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires. To do this, check the air pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐ tem. If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐ sible, please contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel. Run-flat tires Safety information Indication of a flat tire A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster. In addition, a icon with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display. Icon Possible cause There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. Warning The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ stance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐ cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Maximum speed Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. 152 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐ tem. Possible driving distance with a depressurized tire CONTROLS Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. System limits The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: ▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. ▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐ nal circumstances cannot be recognized in advance. ▷ When the system has not been initialized. The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, outside temperature. The driving distance may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used. ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sur‐ face. If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐ tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km. Intelligent Safety Vehicle handling with damaged tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following: ▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). ▷ When driving with tire chains. Concept Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance systems. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intelligent Safety con‐ sists of one or more systems that can help pre‐ vent an imminent collision. ▷ Longer braking distances. ▷ Forward Collision Warning with city collision mitigation, refer to page 154. ▷ Changed self-steering properties. ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 157. Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes. ▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 160. Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ cate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch 153 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety CONTROLS traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Press button briefly: ▷ The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off accord‐ ing to their respective settings. ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings. Adjust the settings as needed. Individual settings are stored for the profile currently used. Press button again: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. ▷ The LED lights up green. Warning Hold down button: Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. ▷ The LED goes out. Forward Collision Warning with city light braking function Overview Button in the vehicle Concept The system may prevent some accidents. In the event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐ pact speed. The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ nent collision and activates brakes independ‐ ently, if needed. Intelligent Safety button The Brake Intervention function activates and applies the brakes with limited force and dura‐ tion. A camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐ trols the system. Switching on/off Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐ gent Safety systems activate according to the last setting. The Forward Collision Warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐ tentionally, the Forward Collision Warning and 154 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety brake intervention are delayed in order to avoid false system reactions. General information CONTROLS Overview Button in the vehicle The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings may vary with the current driving situation. If necessary, a brake intervention will occur. De‐ pending on the equipment and national-market version, the brake intervention will occur up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h or up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h. Intelligent Safety button Safety information Camera Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Warning The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear. Detection range Warning Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. Objects that the system can detect are taken into account. 155 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety CONTROLS Switching on/off Warning with braking function Switching on automatically Display The system is automatically active when the ve‐ hicle is turned on. A warning symbol appears in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision with a detected vehicle is imminent. Switching on/off manually Press button briefly: ▷ The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off accord‐ ing to their respective settings. ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings. Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use. Press button again: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. ▷ The LED lights up green. Icon Measure Icon lights up red: prewarning. Brake and increase distance. Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary. Prewarning This warning is provided, for instance when there is impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking as warranted. Hold down button: Acute warning with braking function ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. An acute warning is displayed when there is an imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle approaching another object at a high speed. ▷ The LED goes out. Setting the warning time The warning time can be set. The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is as‐ sisted by a minor automatic brake intervention in a possible risk of collision. Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" Brake intervention 3. "Intelligent Safety" The warning prompts the driver to intervene. While a warning is active, the maximum braking force is used when the brake is applied. This re‐ quires the brake pedal to be depressed suffi‐ ciently quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop. 4. "Warning time" 5. Select the desired setting. The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ rently used. 156 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety The driver may interrupt the braking intervention function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel. The system’s ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐ formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted. CONTROLS ▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐ activated, for instance DSC OFF. ▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mirror is dirty or obscured. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery. ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky. System limits Safety information Warning sensitivity Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. Detection range The more sensitive the warning settings are, for example the warning time, the more warnings are displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐ cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐ actions. Pedestrian Collision Warning with City Collision Mitigation The system's detection potential is limited. Concept Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late. The system may prevent some accidents with pedestrians. The following situations may not be detected, for example: ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed. When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐ sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a colli‐ sion with pedestrians, and support this with a light braking function. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. The camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐ trols the system. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following situa‐ tions: ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves. General information In sufficiently bright conditions, the system is‐ sues a warning of a possible risk of collision with pedestrians in the speed range from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h The system reacts to people who are within the detection range of the system. 157 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Safety Safety information Intelligent Safety button Warning Camera The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear. Detection range Warning Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ ided into two areas: Overview ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle. Button in the vehicle ▷ Expanded area, arrows 2, to the right and left of the central area. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area. 158 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety Switching on/off CONTROLS Brake intervention Switching on automatically The system is automatically active when the ve‐ hicle is turned on. Switching on/off manually Press button briefly: ▷ The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off accord‐ ing to their respective settings. ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings. Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use. Press button again: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. ▷ The LED lights up green. Hold down button: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. ▷ The LED goes out. Warning with braking function The warning prompts the driver to intervene. While a warning is active, the maximum braking force is used when the brake is applied. This re‐ quires the brake pedal to be depressed suffi‐ ciently quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop. The driver may interrupt the braking intervention function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel. The system’s ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐ formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted. System limits Safety information Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. Display If a collision with a detected person is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. The red icon is displayed and a signal sounds. Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver. Detection range The detection potential of the camera is limited. Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐ sued late. The following situations may not be detected, for example: ▷ Partially covered pedestrians. ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐ cause of the viewing angle or contour. ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. 159 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety CONTROLS ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm. Functional limitations The system may be limited or may not be availa‐ ble in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐ activated, for instance DSC OFF. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ shield is dirty or covered. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery. ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky. ▷ When it is dark outside. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing road and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐ sponse to a warning. Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Lane departure warning Overview Concept Button in the vehicle The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐ cle on roads with lane markings is about to leave the lane. General information Depending on the country version, the system issues a warning at speeds between 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h. Warnings are issued by means of a steering wheel vibration. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving situation. Intelligent Safety button The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane. 160 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety Camera CONTROLS ▷ The LED goes out. Display in the instrument cluster ▷ Yellow icon: system is activated. ▷ Green icon: at least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be is‐ sued. The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Issued warning Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear. If you leave the lane Switching on/off If the turn signal is switched on before changing the lane, a warning is not issued. Switching on automatically The lane departure warning is automatically acti‐ vated after departure, if the function was switched on the last time the engine was stop‐ ped. Switching on/off manually Press button briefly: ▷ The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off accord‐ ing to their respective settings. ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings. Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use. Press button again: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. ▷ The LED lights up green. If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates. End of warning The warning is canceled in the following situa‐ tions: ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. ▷ When returning to your own lane. ▷ When braking hard. ▷ When using the turn signal. System limits Safety information Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. Hold down button: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. 161 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety CONTROLS Functional limitations Function The system may be limited in the following situa‐ tions: The system is switched on each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐ tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐ creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected. ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas. ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. ▷ When lane markings are covered by objects. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery. This procedure takes the following criteria into account: ▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering behavior. ▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length of trip. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommenda‐ tion to take a break. Break recommendation If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break. A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip. Fatigue alert Concept The system can detect decreasing alertness or fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver takes a break. Safety information After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ mately 45 minutes. System limits The function may be limited in the following sit‐ uations and may issue an incorrect warning or no warning at all: ▷ When the time is set incorrectly. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not be detected in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h. ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. ▷ In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently. ▷ When the road surface is poor. ▷ In the event of strong side winds. 162 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Safety CONTROLS The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a break during longer trips on highways. PostCrash – iBrake Concept In the event of an accident, the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐ vention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof. Harder vehicle braking In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake Assistant allows. To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake. For a brief period, the braking pressure will be higher than the braking pressure that is achieved by the automatic braking function. This interrupts automatic braking. Interrupting automatic braking It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐ ing in certain situations, for example for an eva‐ sive maneuver. Interrupt automatic braking: ▷ By pressing the brake pedal. ▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal. At standstill After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐ matically. 163 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Driving stability control systems Driving stability control systems Vehicle features and options Automatic Differential Brake This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. The system controls the driving force by auto‐ matic brake intervention on individual wheels. The function corresponds to a differential lock: the system detects if a wheel begins to spin, be‐ cause of loose road surface, for instance and au‐ tomatically brakes it. Antilock Braking System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐ ing. The vehicle maintains its steering power even during full brake applications, which increases the active safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ gine. The driving force is diverted to the wheel with better traction. As a result, the engine force is transferred more efficiently to the wheels during accelerations. DSC Dynamic Stability Control Concept Within the physical limits, the system helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brake intervention to the individual wheels. General information Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically boosts the vehicle braking capabil‐ ity to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the braking distance to a minimum during an emer‐ gency stop. This system utilizes all of the capa‐ bilities provided by the Antilock Brake System ABS. DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐ ditions, for instance: ▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering. ▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering. Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to page 166, is a version of the DSC where drive power is optimized. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop. 164 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving stability control systems Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. CONTROLS The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐ tioned. Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF General information When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐ duced during acceleration and when driving in curves. To increase driving stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible. Deactivating DSC Warning When driving with a roof load, for instance with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐ ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐ tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dynamic Stability Control when driving with roof load. Press and hold this button but not lon‐ ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. DSC is switched off. Activating DSC Press the button. Overview DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator light go out. Button in the vehicle Indicator/warning lights When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster. The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐ activated. Automatic activation When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation occurs in the following situations: DSC OFF button Indicator/warning lights ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. ▷ When activating cruise control in TRACTION or DSC OFF mode. The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. 165 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving stability control systems CONTROLS DTC Dynamic Traction Control Concept DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability Control where drive power is optimized. The system ensures maximum drive power on unusual road conditions, for instance unplowed snow covered roads, or loose road surfaces, but with somewhat limited driving stability. When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐ mum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves. Drive carefully. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐ der the following special circumstances: Performance Control Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle. To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked individually when a sporty driving style is used. xDrive xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐ cle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC Dy‐ namic Stability Control further optimizes traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably distributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface. ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snowcovered roads. HDC Hill Descent Control ▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose ground. Concept ▷ When driving with tire chains. Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control Activating DTC Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up. Deactivating DTC Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator light go out. Hill Descent Control, HDC, is a downhill control feature that controls the vehicle speed on steep downhill grades, for instance when driving on un‐ paved roads. When the system is active, the vehicle moves at the speed set by the driver, without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. While HDC is controlling the speed, the system automatically distributes the braking force to the individual wheels. This improves vehicle drivabil‐ ity and driving stability. If necessary, the Antilock Braking System prevents the wheels from lock‐ ing. General information Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. Speeds can be set between approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. When the vehicle is moving downhill, the system reduces the speed to the set value, within the physical limits. 166 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving stability control systems CONTROLS Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever position D or R. Increasing or decreasing vehicle speed Overview Using the cruise control rocker switch Button in the vehicle The desired speed can be changed using the cruise control rocker switch on the steering wheel. HDC ▷ Press the rocker switch up: the speed in‐ creases gradually. Activating HDC Press the button. The LED above the but‐ ton lights up. Speeds between approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and ap‐ prox. 20 mph/30 km/h are adopted as the de‐ sired speed. Display in the instrument cluster An icon and the selected desired speed are displayed. ▷ Indicator green: HDC is active. The system is actively braking the vehicle. ▷ Orange display: HDC is on standby. Display in the Head-up Display The HDC status can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. ▷ Press the rocker switch up and hold: the speed increases while the rocker switch is pressed. ▷ Press the rocker switch down: the speed de‐ creases gradually. ▷ Press the rocker switch down and hold: the speed decreases while the rocker switch is pressed. Using the brake pedal While HDC is controlling the speed, the set de‐ sired speed can be reduced by depressing the brake pedal. Deactivating HDC Press the button again. The LED goes out. HDC is automatically deactivated above approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. Malfunction If a malfunction occurs, a message is displayed in the instrument cluster. 167 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving stability control systems CONTROLS Servotronic Overview Button in the vehicle Concept Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steer‐ ing function. The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance, and makes steering firmer when driving at faster speeds. Furthermore, the steering force adapts according to the driving program, so that a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed. M sports steering The M sports steering creates a direct driving style by using smaller steering angles. M sports steering features variable steering force support that takes the speed and lateral acceleration into account. The system enhances agility and im‐ proves handling while maintaining a sporty driv‐ ing style; for example, in tight corners or during evasive maneuvers. At the same time, it ensures improved comfort during parking, turning, and maneuvering. Operating the programs Button Program SPORT COMFORT ECO PRO SPORT Concept Consistently sporty tuning of the steering and drivetrain for greater driving agility. Driving Dynamics Control With the appropriate equipment, the tuning of the chassis also changes and SPORT can be in‐ dividually configured. Concept The configuration is stored for the profile cur‐ rently used. The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features. Various pro‐ grams can be selected for this purpose. Activating SPORT Press the button repeatedly until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster. Configuring SPORT Via iDrive: 168 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving stability control systems CONTROLS The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Driving mode" 4. "Configure SPORT" 5. Select the desired setting. Displays Program selection The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Pressing the button displays a list of the selectable programs. De‐ pending on your vehicle's optional features, the list in the instrument cluster can differ from the illustra‐ This configuration is retrieved when the SPORT drive mode is activated. COMFORT tion shown. Concept Selected program For balanced tuning. The instrument cluster displays the selected program. Activating COMFORT Press the button repeatedly until COM‐ FORT is displayed in the instrument cluster. Adaptive chassis ECO PRO Concept Concept ECO PRO, refer to page 224, provides consis‐ tent tuning to maximize range. Activating ECO PRO Press the button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐ ter. Configuring ECO PRO Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" The tuning of the chassis can be changed with the system. Programs The system offers several different programs. Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 168. SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb‐ ers for greater driving agility. COMFORT/ECO PRO 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Driving mode" 4. "Configure ECO PRO" Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for more comfort. 5. Select the desired setting. 169 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving stability control systems CONTROLS Drive-off assistant Concept This system supports driving off on uphill grades. The parking brake is not required. Driving off with the drive-off assistant 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly. 170 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving comfort CONTROLS Driving comfort Vehicle features and options General information This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Depending on the settings, the cruise control settings may change under certain conditions. Camera-based cruise control with Stop&Go function, ACC Concept Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐ tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed on clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes automatically. If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐ lows. The distance can be adjusted in several steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective speed. A camera on the interior mirror is used to detect vehicles driving ahead. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive again within a brief period, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. 171 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Driving comfort Button Function Warning The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐ dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ tervene where appropriate. Increase the distance, refer to page 174. Rocker switch. Set speed, refer to page 173. Camera Warning Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐ ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐ ing situations: A camera in the area of the interior mirror serves to detect vehicles. ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving vehicle. ▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane. ▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Overview Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear. Functional requirements Buttons on the steering wheel Button Function Cruise control on/off, refer to page 172. Store/maintain speed, refer to page 173. Pause cruise control, refer to page 172. Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 174. Reduce distance, refer to page 174. The system is best used on well-constructed roads. The desired speed can be set between 20 mph/30 km/h and 85 mph/140 km/h. If distance control is switched off, refer to page 174, higher desired speeds can be se‐ lected as well. The system can also be activated when station‐ ary. Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel. 172 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving comfort The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the current speed. CONTROLS Setting the speed Maintaining/storing the speed Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. Switching off To switch off the system while standing, step on brake pedal at the same time. Press the button on the steering wheel. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted. Interrupting manually Press the button on the steering wheel. If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: ▷ When the driver applies the brakes. ▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged. ▷ When Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated. Press the rocker switch up or down once while the system is interrupted. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. The stored speed is displayed in the speedome‐ ter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer to page 175. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. The speed can also be stored by press‐ ing a button. Press the button. Changing the speed ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. ▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are opened while the vehicle is standing still. ▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐ paired, for instance by soiling, heavy precipi‐ tation or glare effects from the sun. ▷ After a stationary period of approx. 3 seconds when the vehicle has been braked to a stop by the system. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. 173 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving comfort CONTROLS ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed in‐ creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. Continuing cruise control General information An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed. Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action. Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐ tional braking or accelerating may occur. Adjusting the distance In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ When the system is switched off. Safety information ▷ When the ignition is switched off. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system limits, braking can be late. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the traffic and weather condi‐ tions and maintain the prescribed safety dis‐ tance, possibly by braking. Calling up the stored speed and distance Press the button with the system inter‐ rupted. Cruise control is continued with the stored values. The selected speed is briefly displayed in the Info Display. Switching distance control on/off Safety information Reducing distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set. The instrument cluster displays the set distance. Increasing distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set. The instrument cluster displays the set distance. Warning The system does not react to traffic driving ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions and brake as needed. Switching distance control off Distance control can be switched off and on when driving with cruise control activated. Press and hold this button, or Press and hold this button. 174 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving comfort The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ter lights up. CONTROLS Distance display Distance 3 To switch distance control back on, press button again briefly. After changing over distance control, a Check Control message is displayed. Displays in the instrument cluster Desired speed and stored speed ▷ Marking lights up green: sys‐ tem is active, the marking indi‐ cates the desired speed. ▷ Marking lights up orange: sys‐ tem is interrupted, the marking indicates the stored speed. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off. Brief status display Selected desired speed. If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐ rently fulfilled. Distance to vehicle ahead of you Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is shown. Distance display Distance 1 Distance 2 Distance 4 This value is set automatically after the system is switched on. Detected vehicle Icon lights up orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you. Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away. ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, activate ACC by briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal or pressing the RES CNCL button or the rocker switch. Indicator/warning lights Icon flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for the system to work. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. Icon flashes red and a signal sounds: You are prompted to intervene by brak‐ ing or making an evasive maneuver. The system has been interrupted or dis‐ tance control is temporarily suppressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected. Distance control is temporarily sup‐ pressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was detected. 175 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Driving comfort Displays in the Head-up Display Merging vehicles Some system information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. System limits Detection range A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle. The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected. Deceleration The system does not decelerate in the following situations: ▷ For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slowmoving road users. If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly merges into your lane, the system may not be able to au‐ tomatically restore the selected distance. It may not be possible to restore the selected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reli‐ ably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out eva‐ sive maneuvers, if needed. Cornering ▷ For red traffic lights. ▷ For cross traffic. ▷ For oncoming traffic. ▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking lighting at night. If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐ tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐ tected very late. 176 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving comfort CONTROLS Engine power The desired speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐ tem fails or was automatically deactivated. When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐ activated and controls speed independently. The system may be limited in the following situa‐ tions: ▷ When an object was not correctly detected. ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ shield is dirty or covered. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. Driving off In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example: ▷ On steep uphill grades. ▷ In front of bumps in the road. In these cases, press on the accelerator pedal. Weather The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐ orable weather or light conditions: ▷ Poorer vehicle recognition. ▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized. Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐ tions: ▷ Wet conditions. ▷ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en‐ gine, via the Start/Stop button. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery. Cruise control Concept Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐ justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed. General information Depending on the settings, the cruise control settings may change under certain conditions. ▷ Snowfall. ▷ Slush. Safety information ▷ Fog. ▷ Glare. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐ stance by braking, steering or evading. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic 177 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Driving comfort situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. Button Function Pause cruise control, refer to page 178. Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 179. Warning The use of the system can lead to an increased risk of accidents in the following situations, for instance: ▷ On winding roads. ▷ In heavy traffic. ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet conditions, or on a loose road surface. There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐ age to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible. Rocker switch: Set speed, refer to page 179. Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel. The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed. Warning The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐ dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ tervene where appropriate. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. Switching off Press the button on the steering wheel. Overview The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted. Buttons on the steering wheel Interrupting manually Button Function Cruise control on/off, refer to page 178. Store speed, refer to page 179. When active, press the button on the steering wheel. Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: ▷ When the driver applies the brakes. ▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few sec‐ onds or released while a gear is not engaged. ▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the current speed. 178 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving comfort ▷ If selector lever position N is set. CONTROLS Changing the speed ▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. Setting the speed Maintaining/storing the speed Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. Press the rocker switch up or down once while the system is interrupted. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. The stored speed is displayed in the speedome‐ ter and in the instrument cluster, refer to page 180. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐ ton. Press the button. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed in‐ creases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed in‐ creases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or decelerates without pressure on the acceler‐ ator pedal. After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐ cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly. Continuing cruise control General information An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed. Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐ tional braking or accelerating may occur. In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: 179 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving comfort CONTROLS ▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ When the ignition is switched off. Calling up the stored speed Press the button on the steering wheel. The stored speed is reached again and main‐ tained. Displays in the instrument cluster Indicator light Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ ped, the indicator light in the instrument cluster indicates whether the system is switched on. Desired speed and stored speed ▷ Marking lights up green: sys‐ tem is active, the marking indi‐ cates the desired speed. ▷ Marking lights up orange: sys‐ tem is interrupted, the marking indicates the stored speed. System limits Engine power The desired speed is also maintained downhill, but may not be maintained on uphill grades if en‐ gine power is insufficient. PDC Park Distance Control Concept PDC is a support when parking. The system de‐ tects objects behind the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in front of the vehicle are detected too. Objects that you are approaching slowly are indicated by signal tones and a display on the Control Display. General information The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐ tances are located in the bumpers. The range, depending on obstacles and environ‐ mental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given in the following situations: ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off. ▷ By the front sensors and the two rear corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the ob‐ ject. Status display ▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m. Selected desired speed. ▷ When a collision is imminent. Safety information If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐ rently fulfilled. Displays in the Head-up Display Some system information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic 180 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving comfort closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. CONTROLS Switching on/off Switching on automatically The system switches on automatically in the fol‐ lowing situations: Warning Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance Control is activated, the warning can be de‐ layed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control is not yet active. ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running. The rearview camera also switches on. ▷ If equipped with front PDC: when obstacles are detected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. You may switch automatic activation when ob‐ stacles are detected on and off. Via iDrive: Overview With front PDC: button in vehicle 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Parking" 4. "Automatic PDC Activation": depending on the vehicle equipment. 5. "Automatic PDC Activation" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Park assistance button Ultrasound sensors Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, for instance in the bumpers. If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detection, for instance in car washes, to reduce false alarms. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on, if needed. Functional requirements Ensure full functionality: ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐ ers, bicycle racks. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. With front PDC: switching on/off manually Press the park assistance button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. 181 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Driving comfort The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐ verse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button. Visual warning Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐ tem cannot be switched off manually if the re‐ verse gear is engaged. Warning Signal tones An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals. When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. With front PDC: when objects are simultaneously located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded. The approach of the vehicle to an object is shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Control Display before a signal sounds. A display appears as soon as Park Distance Con‐ trol (PDC) is activated. The range of the sensors is represented in the colors green, yellow and red. When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ played, the switch can be made to PDC: 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. The signal tone is switched off, when selector lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission. 2. Volume Safety information The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the entertainment volume can be adjusted. Via iDrive: "Rear view camera" System limits Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Tone" 4. "Volume settings" 5. "PDC" 6. Set the desired value. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐ urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the following situations: 182 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving comfort ▷ For small children and animals. ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance coats. ▷ Due to heavy exhaust. ▷ With external interference of the ultrasound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position. ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐ fall, extreme heat, or strong wind. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ With moving objects. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. ▷ If cargo protrudes. ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. False warnings The system may issue a warning under the fol‐ lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐ cle within the detection range: ▷ In heavy rain. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice. ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. ▷ On rough road surfaces. ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. ▷ In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐ rages. CONTROLS ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights. The malfunction is signaled by a continuous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultra‐ sound sources is no longer present, the system is again fully functional. To prevent false alarms, switch off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detection, for in‐ stance in automatic car washes. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded area on the Control Display. PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐ ice center or repair shop. Rearview camera Concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐ play. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Ad‐ just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐ tively intervene where appropriate. 183 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Driving comfort Overview Switch the system back on, if needed. Depending on the vehicle equipment: button in the vehicle Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually Press the park assistance button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display. Switching the view via iDrive Park assistance button If the rearview camera view is not displayed, change the view via iDrive: Camera 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. 2. "Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed. Display on the Control Display Functional requirements ▷ The rearview camera is switched on. ▷ The tailgate is fully closed. The camera lens is located between the license plate lights. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If necessary, clean the camera lens. ▷ Keep the recording range of the camera open. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and trailers that are not connected to a trailer power socket can lead to malfunctions. Activating assistance functions Switching on/off Switching on automatically The system is switched on automatically if selec‐ tor lever position R is engaged when the engine is running. More than one assistance function can be active at the same time. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. ▷ Parking aid lines "Parking aid lines" Lanes and turning radius lines are indicated. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. ▷ Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking" Obstacles are marked, depending on the ve‐ hicle equipment. 184 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving comfort CONTROLS Lanes Obstacle marking Lanes can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera. Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera. Lanes help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads. Lanes depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements. Turning radius lines The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Control. Parking using lanes and turning radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning radius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space. Turning radius lines can only be superimposed on the rearview camera image together with lanes. Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road. Only one turning radius line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain angle. 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the lane covers the corresponding turning ra‐ dius line. 185 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Driving comfort Parking assistant Display settings Brightness With the rearview camera switched on: Concept 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. 2. Select the icon. 3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the Controller. Contrast With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. 2. Select the icon. This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road. 3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the Controller. General information System limits Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps: ▷ Switching on and activating. Detection of objects Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system. Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐ sistance functions also consider data from the PDC Park Distance Control. Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol chapter. The objects displayed on the Control Display may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display. The bumper of the vehicle is not visible in the camera picture. Do not drive closer toward an obstacle than shown by the marks in the camera picture. This also applies, when the camera pic‐ ture still shows a gap between the vehicle and the obstacle. ▷ Parking space search. ▷ Parking. System status and instructions on required ac‐ tions are displayed on the Control Display. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐ ble parking line and takes control of steering dur‐ ing the parking operation. The parking assistant uses the sensors of PDC Park Distance Control. Also follow the safety in‐ formation for PDC Park Distance Control. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic 186 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving comfort closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. CONTROLS Functional requirements Ultrasound sensors Ensure full functionality: NOTICE The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Also follow the safety information for PDC Park Distance Control. Overview ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐ ers. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. For measuring parking spaces ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: 5 ft/1.5 m. Suitable parking space Button in the vehicle ▷ Gaps behind an object that has a min. length of 5 ft/1.5 m. ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. ▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m. ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. For the parking operation Park assistance button Ultrasound sensors ▷ Doors and tailgate closed. ▷ Parking brake released. ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the driv‐ er's side, the corresponding turn signal must be switched on. Switching on and activating Switching on with the button Press the park assistance button. The LED lights up. The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the side of the vehicle. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Parking assistant is activated automatically. 187 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving comfort CONTROLS Switching on with reverse gear straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray. Shift into reverse. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. To activate: "Parking Assistant" Display on the Control Display Parking using the parking assistant 1. System activated/deactivated Icon Meaning Press the park assistance button or shift into reverse gear to switch on the park‐ ing assistant, refer to page 187. Activate the parking assistant, if needed. Parking assistant is activated. Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not ac‐ tivated. 2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a dis‐ tance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed, refer to page 188, on the Control Display. The system is activated. Parking space search and system status 3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. The parking assistant takes control of steer‐ ing during the parking operation. The driver takes over braking and accelerating. The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle wait for the automatic steering wheel move. The end of the parking operation is indicated on the Control Display. ▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking assistant is activated and the parking space search is active. ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐ hicle symbol. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐ lighted. ▷ The parking operation is ac‐ tive. Steering control has been taken over by system. ▷ Parking space search is always active when‐ ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and 4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if needed. Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time: ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the icon on the Control Display. ▷ Press the park assistance button. Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: 188 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Driving comfort ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering. ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the display. ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. ▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces. ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded. ▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays clearances that are too small. ▷ When switching to another function on the Control Display. A Check Control message is displayed. Resuming An interrupted parking operation can be contin‐ ued, if needed. CONTROLS er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations: ▷ In tight curves. Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following situa‐ tions: ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads. ▷ On slippery ground. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space. ▷ With a mounted emergency wheel. Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to page 187, and follow the instructions on the dis‐ play. ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge of a port. Switching off The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐ urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the following situations: The system can be switched off as follows: ▷ Press the park assistance button. Limits of ultrasonic measurement ▷ For small children and animals. ▷ Switching off the ignition. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance coats. System limits ▷ With external interference of the ultrasound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines. Safety information ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position. Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐ fall, extreme heat, or strong wind. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ With moving objects. 189 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Driving comfort ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. ▷ If cargo protrudes. ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. ▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may be detected or suitable parking spaces may not be detected at all. Tire size The parking position may vary depending on the tire size. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 190 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Climate control CONTROLS Climate control Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Interior air quality The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the following components: ▷ Emission tested passenger compartment. ▷ Microfilter. ▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐ perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode. Depending on the equipment specification: ▷ Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter. ▷ Automatic recirculated-air control AUC. ▷ Parked-car ventilation. Air conditioner 1 Air distribution settings 5 Air recirculation mode 2 Air conditioning 6 Temperature 3 Air flow 7 Seat heating, right 84 4 Air flow display 8 Rear window defroster 191 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Climate control CONTROLS 9 Seat heating, left 84 Climate control functions in detail Switching the system on/off Switching on Press any button except for the following: ▷ Rear window defroster. Switching on/off Press the button. The LED is illuminated with air condi‐ tioning switched on. Depending on the weather, the windshield and side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ gine is started. The cooling mode produces condensation, refer to page 219, that will exit from below the vehicle. ▷ Seat heating. Switching off Press and hold the left button until the control switches off. Air recirculation mode Concept You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle. Temperature Concept The system heats or cools, depending on the set temperature. Operation Press button repeatedly to select an op‐ erating mode: Adjusting Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature. Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐ ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature. Air conditioning Concept The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐ humidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again. ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is permanently blocked. To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the environmental conditions. With constant air recirculation mode, the air qual‐ ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases. If the windows fog over, switch off air recircula‐ tion mode and increase the air flow, if needed. The car's interior can only be cooled with the en‐ gine running. 192 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Climate control Air flow, manual ▷ Concept CONTROLS Windows, upper body region, and floor area. The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually. To defrost windows and remove condensation Adjusting Make the following settings to defrost the win‐ dows and remove condensation: Press the left or right side of the button: to decrease or increase air flow. ▷ Direct the air distribution onto the windows. ▷ Increasing the air flow. The intensity is indicated by LEDs. The highest level is active when seven LEDs are lit. ▷ Increase the temperature. The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐ duced automatically to save battery power. Rear window defroster Manual air distribution Concept The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐ justed manually. Adjusting Turn the wheel to select the de‐ sired program or the desired in‐ termediate setting. ▷ Switch on air conditioning if needed. Press the button. The LED lights up. The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time. For permanent activation, press the button for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the button again. The rear window defroster can only be activated continuously at an outside temperature below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃. Microfilter In external and recirculated-air mode, the micro‐ filter filters dust and pollen from the air. ▷ Windows. ▷ Upper body region. ▷ Floor area. Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐ nance, refer to page 262. 193 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Climate control Automatic climate control 1 To defrost windows and remove condensa‐ tion 9 Temperature, right 2 Temperature, left 11 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ lated-air mode 3 AUTO program 10 Air conditioning 4 To switch off the system 12 Seat heating, right 84 5 Air flow, AUTO intensity 13 Air distribution settings 6 Display 14 Seat heating, left 84 7 SYNC program 15 Interior temperature sensor 8 Maximum cooling 16 Rear window defroster Climate control functions in detail Switching off Switching the system on/off Press the button. Temperature Switching on Press any button except for the following: Concept ▷ SYNC program. The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary by using the maximum cooling or heating power, and then keeps it constant. ▷ Rear window defroster. ▷ Seat heating. 194 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Climate control Adjusting CONTROLS Functional requirement Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature. The function is available above an outside tem‐ perature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the en‐ gine running. Switching on/off The selected temperature is shown on the dis‐ play of the automatic climate control. Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐ ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature. Press the button. The LED is illuminated with the system switched on. Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ gion. The vents need to be open for this. Air conditioning The air flow can be adjusted with the program active. Concept AUTO program The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐ humidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again. Concept The car's interior can only be cooled with the en‐ gine running. Switching on/off Press the button. The LED is illuminated with air condi‐ tioning switched on. Depending on the weather, the windshield and side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ gine is started. Air conditioning is switched on automatically with the AUTO program. When using the cooling mode, condensation that will exit below the vehicle. The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats the car's interior automatically. The air distribution and temperature are control‐ led automatically depending on the temperature in the car's interior and the desired temperature setting including the selected intensity of the air flow. Switching on/off Press the button. The LED is illuminated with the AUTO program switched on. Depending on the selected settings and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the floor area. Maximum cooling Air conditioning, refer to page 195, is switched on automatically with the AUTO program. Concept Point the side vents toward the side windows. The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐ timum air flow and air recirculation mode. At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ trols the program so as to prevent window con‐ densation as much as possible. 195 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Climate control Intensity With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐ sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic control for the air mass. Press the left or right side of the button: to decrease or increase intensity. The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. If the windows are fogged over, switch off the re‐ circulated-air mode and press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield. Air flow, manual Concept The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually. Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode General information Concept To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO program first. The automatic recirculated-air control recognizes pollutants in the outside air. The outside air sup‐ ply is shut off and the interior air is recirculated. General information If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐ tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off automatically. If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐ ously flows into the car's interior. With constant air recirculation mode, the air qual‐ ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases. Switching on/off Press button repeatedly to select an op‐ erating mode: ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐ trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off automatically. Adjusting Press the left or right side of the button: to decrease or increase air flow. The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. The air flow may be reduced automatically to save battery power. Manual air distribution Concept The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐ justed manually. Adjusting Press the button repeatedly to select a program: ▷ Upper body region and floor area. ▷ Floor area. ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the sup‐ ply of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ nently blocked. ▷ Windows and floor area. Recirculated-air mode switches off automatically at low outside temperatures after a certain amount of time in order to avoid window fogging. ▷ Upper body region. ▷ Windows. ▷ Windows and upper body region. ▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area. If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor. 196 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Climate control SYNC program CONTROLS The rear window defroster can only be activated continuously at an outside temperature below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃. Concept The system allows the transfer of the current setting of the temperature on the driver's side to the front passenger side. Switching on/off Press the button. The current setting of the temperature on the driver's side is transferred to the front passenger side. The program is switched off if the setting on the front passenger side is changed. Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated-air mode, the micro‐ filter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐ nance, refer to page 262. Ventilation Front ventilation To defrost windows and remove condensation Concept Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side windows. Switching on/off Press the button. The LED is illuminated with the system switched on. The air flow can be adjusted with the program active. If the windows are fogged over, you can also switch on air conditioning or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor. Rear window defroster Press the button. The LED lights up. The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ row 1. ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 2. Adjusting ▷ Ventilation for cooling: Adjust the vent so that the air is directed to‐ wards you, for instance when the vehicle is too hot. ▷ Draft-free ventilation: Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. For permanent activation, press the button for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the button again. 197 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Climate control CONTROLS Ventilation in the rear ▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. ▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out. Switching on/off directly Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ row 1. ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing of the vents, arrow 2. 4. "Activate comfort ventilation now" The icon on the automatic climate control flashes if the system is switched on. Preselecting the activation time Parked-car ventilation Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" Concept The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's in‐ terior and lowers its temperature, if needed. 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "Comfort ventilation" 5. Select the desired activation time. General information The parked-car ventilation can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset activation times. The system remains switched on for 30 minutes. The parked-car ventilation system is operated via iDrive. Functional requirements ▷ Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready state. ▷ Direct operation or preset activation time: does not depend on outside temperature. ▷ Battery is sufficiently charged. If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the maximum activation time to save the ve‐ hicle battery. The system will be available again after the engine is started or after a short trip. 6. Set the desired time. Activating the activation time Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "For start time at:" Activate the desired activation time. The icon on the automatic climate control lights up when the activation time is activated. The icon on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐ vated. 198 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Interior equipment CONTROLS Interior equipment Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Integrated Universal Remote Control Concept The integrated Universal Remote Control in the interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives, barriers, or lighting systems. General information The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐ ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐ sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control. Safety information Warning The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held trans‐ mitter. Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the owner's manual of the system to be controlled, the system is generally compatible with the integrated Universal Remote Control. Additional questions are answered by: ▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐ tions for the sake of security. If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐ mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐ sible operation. 199 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Interior equipment Control elements on the interior mirror Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ terior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds. 6. ▷ The LED lights up green: programming completed. Release the button. ▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not complete. ▷ LED, arrow 1. ▷ Buttons, arrow 2. ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ quired for programming. Programming Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐ cedure three times to complete the pro‐ gramming procedure. If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for change code wireless systems. ▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐ onds: programming not completed. General information The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be fully charged at the time of programming to en‐ sure an optimal range of the integrated universal remote control. Repeat steps 3 to 6. To program other functions on other buttons, re‐ peat steps 3 to 5. Special feature of the rolling code wireless system 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup: Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐ mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green rapidly. This erases all programming of the buttons on the interior mirror. If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐ led system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features a rolling code radio system. Refer to the owner's manual for the system. 3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐ grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will slowly begin flashing orange. For systems with a rolling code radio system, the integrated Universal Remote Control and the system also have to be synchronized. 4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the handheld transmitter. Please read the owner's manual to find out how to synchronize the system. 5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person. Synchronizing the universal remote control with the system: 200 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Interior equipment 1. Park the vehicle within range of the remotecontrolled system. 2. Program the desired button on the interior mirror as described. 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed, e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. 4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐ terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐ zation. Once synchronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out. Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be programmed. 3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐ lease the button. 4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the handheld transmitter. 5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter. Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ terior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds. 6. The LED can light up in different ways. ▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐ ming procedure is completed. Release the button. ▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held transmitter was detected but program‐ ming is not complete. CONTROLS Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐ cedure three times to complete the pro‐ gramming procedure. If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for change code wireless systems. ▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐ onds: programming not completed. Repeat steps 3 to 6. If the programming procedure is not completed, the previous programming will remain un‐ changed. Operation Warning The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held trans‐ mitter. The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐ erated using the button on the interior mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior mirror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐ mitted. Deleting stored functions All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐ tions cannot be deleted individually. Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐ terior mirror simultaneously for approximately 201 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Interior equipment CONTROLS 10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror flashes green rapidly. Sun visor Glare shield Fold the sun visor down or up. Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover. Depending on the equipment version, the mirror lighting may switch on when the cover is opened. There is a risk of fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that children do not use the cigarette lighter. NOTICE If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket. Ashtray/cigarette lighter Ashtray Opening The cigarette lighter is located in the center con‐ sole. Push in the cigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter can be re‐ moved as soon as it pops back out. The ashtray can be inserted in the cup holder. Sockets Emptying Take out the insert. General information Cigarette lighter The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is running or when the ignition is switched on. Warning Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the objects. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐ patible connectors. 202 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Interior equipment Safety information CONTROLS In the front passenger floor area Warning Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior during un‐ folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding. The socket is located below the glove compart‐ ment. NOTICE Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt electrical system can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property, among other potential dam‐ age. Only connect battery chargers for the ve‐ hicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment. NOTICE If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket. Front center console In the cargo area The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area. USB port Concept Mobile devices with a USB port can be con‐ nected to the USB port. General information Follow the information regarding the connection of mobile devices to the USB port in the section on USB connections, refer to page 53. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter. 203 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Interior equipment CONTROLS In the rear center console USB port in front In the center console Two USB ports are located in the rear center console. The USB port is located in the center console. Properties: Properties: ▷ USB port Type C. ▷ USB port Type C. ▷ For charging of mobile devices. ▷ With Wireless Charging: for charging mobile devices and for data transfer. ▷ Charge current: max. 3 A per connection. ▷ Without Wireless Charging: for charging of mobile devices. Connecting an external device ▷ Charge current: max. 3 A. ▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐ tor into the USB port. In the front center console Follow the following when connecting: ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable. ▷ Protect the USB device against mechanical damage. ▷ Due to the large number of USB devices available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐ teed that every device is operable on the ve‐ hicle. The USB port is located in the front center con‐ sole. ▷ USB port Type A. ▷ For charging mobile devices and for data transfer. ▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A. ▷ Do not expose USB devices to extreme envi‐ ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐ peratures; refer to the owner's manual of the device. ▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐ niques, proper playback of the media stored on the USB device cannot be guaranteed in all cases. ▷ A connected USB device will be supplied with charge current via the USB port if the device supports this. At higher temperatures, the charge current through the USB device may be reduced. 204 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Interior equipment CONTROLS ▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB device via the on‐ board socket, when it is connected to the USB port. NOTE ▷ Depending on how the USB device is being used, settings may be required on the USB storage device, refer to the owner's manual of the device. Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be maintained in every direction when operating the device. This device has been tested for human exposure limits and found compliant at a minimum dis‐ tance of 4 in/10 cm during operation. Non-compatible USB devices: ▷ USB hard drives. ▷ USB hubs. ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots. ▷ HFS-formatted USB devices. ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps. Wireless charging tray Mounting position of the product. Concept Safety information The wireless charging tray enables the following functions to be performed without cables: ▷ Charging the rechargeable battery of a mo‐ bile phone with Qi capability and of other mo‐ bile devices, which support the Qi standard. ▷ Connect the mobile phone to the external an‐ tenna. Depending on the country, this provides for better network reception and a consistent re‐ production quality. General information When inserting the mobile phone, make sure there are no objects between it and the wireless charging tray. During charging, the surface of the tray and the mobile phone may become warm. Higher tem‐ peratures may lead to a reduction in the charge current through the mobile phone, and in iso‐ lated cases the charging process is paused tem‐ porarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the mobile phone owner's manual. Warning When charging a device that meets the Qi standard in the wireless charging tray, any metal objects located between the device and the tray can become very hot. Placing storage devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal transmission, between the device and the tray may impair the card function. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. When charging mobile devices, make sure there are no objects between the device and the tray. NOTICE The tray is intended for mobile phones up to a particular size. Forceful inserting of the mobile phone into the tray can damage the tray or the mobile phone. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Ob‐ serve the maximum dimensions for mobile 205 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Interior equipment CONTROLS phones. Do not force the mobile phone into the tray. 1. Open the center armrest. 2. Push back the clamp. 3. Insert the mobile phone with the display fac‐ ing upward in the direction of the front holder, arrow 1. Overview Tray in the center console: 4. Place the mobile phone in the storage area, arrow 2. 1 Front holder with LED 2 Storage area 5. Push the clamp forward and clamp the mo‐ bile phone in the tray. 3 Movable clamp Functional requirements ▷ The mobile phone must compatibly support the required Qi standard. If the mobile phone does not support the Qi standard, the mobile phone can be charged using a special Qi-compatible charging case. ▷ The ignition is switched on. ▷ Observe the maximum dimensions of the mobile phone. ▷ Use only protective jackets and covers up to a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm. Oth‐ erwise, the charging function may be im‐ paired. ▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located in the center of the tray. 6. Close the center armrest. Removing the mobile phone 1. Open the center armrest. 2. Push the clamp back and remove the mobile phone. LED displays Color Meaning Blue The mobile phone is charging. Depending on the model and the ve‐ hicle, the blue LED is no longer illumi‐ nated once the inserted mobile phone with Qi capability is fully charged. Orange The mobile phone is not charging. Temperature on the mobile phone possibly too high or foreign object in the charging tray. Operation Inserting the mobile phone The mobile phone must not exceed the maxi‐ mum size of approximately 5.9 x 3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm. Red The mobile phone is not charging. Contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. 206 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Interior equipment System limits At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile phone may be limited and some functions may no longer work. CONTROLS ▷ AT&T online registration link (https:// securec45.securewebsession.com/attsignal‐ booster.com/). ▷ U.S.Cellular online registration link (http:// www.uscellular.com/uscellular/support/fccbooster-registration.jsp). LTE-Compensator - Information and User Manual Before use you must register your booster de‐ vice with your wireless provider. Your car is equipped with a wireless charging tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and connect it to the mobile network. To ensure the best possible connection a signal booster (LTECompensator) is used in conjunction with the WCA. The following paragraphs refer to this booster: If you should be requested by the FCC to cease operating your booster you are not allowed to in‐ sert your mobile phone in the charging tray any‐ more unless the booster is permanently deacti‐ vated by your local BMW dealer. This is a CONSUMER device. BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE‐ VICE with your wireless provider and have your provider's consent. Most wireless providers con‐ sent to the use of Compensators. Some provid‐ ers may not consent to the use of this device on their network. If you are unsure, contact your provider. You MUST operate this device with ap‐ proved antennas and cables as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You MUST cease operating this device immediately if requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless service provider. Warning E911 location informa‐ tion may not be provided or may be inaccurate for calls served by using this device. Please observe additionally the following infor‐ mation ▷ Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to register their signal boosters by calling their toll-free number. ▷ T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mo‐ bile.com/BoosterRegistration); (https://saqat.tmobile.com/sites/SignalBooster#). ▷ Verizon’s online registration link: (http:// www.verizonwireless.com/wcms/consumer/ register-signal-booster.html). You must not remove the booster from the car nor use it with any other than the preinstalled coupling device or antenna. Any modification of the existing antenna or coupling device as well as the use of other antennas or coupling devices will cause the cease of the booster´s operating li‐ cense. The booster device fulfills the network protection standards as required by the FCC, such as inter‐ modulation limits, oscillation detection and gain limits. Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive Model Number: LTECOMPB0 Part Number: 6803145-01 FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0 Cargo area Cargo cover Safety information Warning Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a 207 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Interior equipment cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ terior. Removing the cargo floor panel 1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel for‐ ward. General information The cargo cover can be removed in order to load bulky luggage. Removing 1. Detach the retaining straps at the tailgate. 2. Pry cover up a bit, arrow 1, and pull out of the brackets toward the back, arrow 2. 2. Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold up above the locking point of the upper position, refer to page 208. 3. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from the brackets. Inserting the cargo floor panel 1. Push the cargo area floor into the supports at a shallow angle. The cargo area floor must engage noticeably. Installing Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall. The cargo cover must engage audibly into place on its holders. Variable cargo floor panel Concept With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo area can be configured corresponding to transport re‐ quirements. 2. Fold the cargo area floor over downward. Folded up position General information Follow the information on securing the cargo, re‐ fer to page 221. Safety information Warning Improper use of the variable cargo floor panel can lead to a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. 208 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Interior equipment ▷ Do not use the variable cargo floor panel to separate the cargo area and vehicle in‐ terior in the sense of a partition net. ▷ Only use the variable cargo floor panel in the folded-up position when the backrests are folded up and locked. ▷ Fold down the variable cargo floor panel before driving off. ▷ Always secure cargo against shifting, us‐ ing straps, belts and lashing eyes, for in‐ stance. Fold up the cargo floor panel Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel up‐ ward. CONTROLS Safety information Warning Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐ rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ ment of the rear backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down. Warning If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior; for instance, in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back. Warning Fold up the cargo floor panel. You've reached the maximum cargo height. Enlarging the cargo area Concept The cargo area can be enlarged as follows: ▷ The rear seat backrests can be folded down. ▷ The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright position, refer to page 84. General information The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40– 20–40. The side rear seat backrests and the center section can be folded down separately. The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the rear. Unexpected movements of the rear seat back‐ rest while driving may occur due to uninten‐ tional unlocking of the rear seat backrests by the straps. There is a risk of injury. Only use straps for releasing the rear seat backrests. Do not attach objects on the straps. Warning With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐ tective function of the middle safety belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If you are using the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest. Warning The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐ ited or compromised with incorrect seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the 209 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 CONTROLS Interior equipment backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐ rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ straints or remove them. Folding back the backrest 1. Pull the strap. NOTICE Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property, among other potential dam‐ age. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest including head restraint is clear when folding down. Folding down the rear seat backrest from the rear 2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward. The rear seat backrest first engages in an upright posi‐ tion. 3. Pull the strap again. 4. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seat position and engage it. 1. Pull loop to unlock the rear seat backrest. Ski and snowboard bag The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a protective jacket in the cargo area. Follow the installation and owner's manual in‐ cluded in the protective jacket. 2. The rear seat backrest folds forward. 210 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Storage compartments CONTROLS Storage compartments Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Safety information ▷ Storage compartment up front in the center console, refer to page 211. ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side, refer to page 212. ▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, refer to page 212. ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to page 212. ▷ Storage compartment in the center armrest, refer to page 213. ▷ Cup holder, refer to page 213. ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center con‐ sole, refer to page 213. ▷ Clothes hooks, refer to page 214. ▷ Storage compartments in the cargo area, re‐ fer to page 214. Warning Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ terior. ▷ Additional storage compartments in the car's interior, refer to page 214. Storage compartment up front in the center console NOTICE Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐ age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not use anti-slip pads. There is a storage compartment under the cover. Storage compartments in the car's interior The following storage compartments are availa‐ ble in the car's interior: 211 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Storage compartments CONTROLS Glove compartment Front passenger side a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐ ment immediately after using it. Opening Safety information Warning Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐ partment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐ ment immediately after using it. Pull the handle. Closing Opening Fold cover closed. Compartments in the doors General information There are storage compartments in the doors. Safety information Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on. Warning Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an accident or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any breakable objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage compartments. Closing Fold cover closed. Driver's side Safety information Warning Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐ partment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is 212 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Storage compartments Center armrest Cup holders Front Safety information A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats. CONTROLS Warning Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled liquids can distract from the traffic conditions and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐ weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages. Opening Pull the lever, arrow 1, and fold the center arm‐ rest up, arrow 2. Front Adjusting The center armrest can be adjusted in several tilt settings. Storage compartment in the rear center console Two cup holders are located under the cover. Rear NOTICE A storage compartment is located in the center console. With an open cup holder, the center armrest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Press back the covers before the cen‐ ter armrest is folded up. In the center armrest. 213 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Storage compartments CONTROLS Warning Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐ weight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks. Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. To open: press the button. To close: push both covers back in, one after the other. Additional storage compartments in the car's interior Nets on the backrests of the front seats The nets on the backrests of the front seats can also be used to store small parts. Storage compartments in the cargo area Side storage compartment, right A storage compartment is located on the righthand side. Net for storage compartment Smaller objects can be stored in the net of right storage compartment. Multifunction hook Warning Clothes hooks General information The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐ dles in the rear. Safety information Improper use of the multifunction hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers, for example. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects, such as shopping bags, from the multifunction hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been appropriately secured. Warning Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐ struct the view while driving. There is a risk of accident. When suspending clothing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view. 214 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Storage compartments CONTROLS A multifunction hook is located on each side of the cargo area. Tensioning strap A tensioning strap is available on the left side trim for fastening small objects. Lashing eyes in the cargo area To secure the cargo, refer to page 221, there are lashing eyes in the cargo area. Storage space under cargo floor panel There is a storage space under the cargo floor panel: 1. Fold down the rear part of the cargo floor panel. 2. Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold up above the locking point of the upper position, refer to page 208. 215 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Breaking-in period General information Moving parts need to begin working together smoothly. The following instructions will help you to ach‐ ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. Engine, transmission, and axle drive Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h. Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstan‐ ces. From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased. Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. During break-in, do not use the Launch Control. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. Safety information Brake system Warning Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a de‐ lay. There is a risk of accident. After installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conser‐ vatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐ serve the break-in procedures of the respective parts and components. Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately during this break-in period. Following part replacement Observe the break-in procedures again, if com‐ ponents mentioned above are replaced. Driving on poor roads Concept Because of its greater ground clearance, the ve‐ hicle can be driven on a variety of road types and qualities. 216 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Things to remember when driving All-wheel drive can help improve drive power. Safety information NOTICE DRIVING TIPS General driving notes Closing the tailgate Safety information Objects in unpaved areas, for instance stones or branches, can damage the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property, among other po‐ tential damage. Do not drive on unpaved ter‐ rain. When driving on poor roads For your own safety, for the safety of passengers and of the vehicle, heed the following points: ▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. Warning An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and can endanger occupants and other traffic par‐ ticipants or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ age to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open. ▷ Do not take risks when driving. Driving with the tailgate open ▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface condi‐ tions. The steeper and more uneven the road surface, the slower the speed should be. If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: ▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill grades: add engine oil and coolant up to near the MAX mark. ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. ▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent Control HDC. Hot exhaust gas system ▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in con‐ tact with the ground. The ground clearance is no more than 7.8 in‐ ches/20 cm and can vary according to the ve‐ hicle's load. ▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the accelerator so that driving stability control systems can distribute the driving force to the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ trol if available. After a trip on poor roads After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and tires for damage to maintain driving safety. Clear heavy soiling from the body. ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. ▷ Drive moderately. Warning High temperatures can occur underneath the body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas system, while driving. Contact with the exhaust gas system can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas sys‐ tem, including the exhaust pipe. Warning If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the ex‐ haust gas system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injuries. Do not re‐ move the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no com‐ 217 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS bustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or during parking. Mobile communication devices in the vehicle Warning Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐ fluence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mobile phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. If possible, in the car's interior use only mobile phones with direct connections to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual interference and deflect the radiation from the car's interior. Safety information NOTICE When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐ ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐ ment, the electrical system or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through water. Braking safely General information The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking System ABS as a standard feature. Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐ quire such. Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle. Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that the ABS is in its active mode. Objects in the movement area around pedals and floor area Driving through water Warning General information When driving through water, follow the following: ▷ Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function. ▷ Drive through calm water only. ▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper than a maximum of 9.8 inches/25 cm. ▷ Drive through water no faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐ curely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning. 218 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS Driving in wet conditions Brake disc corrosion When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gen‐ tly press the brake pedal every few miles. Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are increased by the following circumstances: Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic. ▷ Low mileage. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it. ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning agents. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their response generally this cannot be corrected. Hills General information Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and reduce brake effi‐ ciency. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed. Condensation water under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, con‐ densation water develops and collects under‐ neath the vehicle. Driving on racetracks Safety information Warning Warning Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system. Warning In idle state or with the engine switched off, safety functions, for instance engine braking ef‐ fect, braking assistance and steering assis‐ tance, may not be available. There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state or with the engine switched off. The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport or motor sport type competition. There is a risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type competitions. Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. Use of the vehicle in M sport or motor sport type competition is an improper use of the vehicle and may affect your warranty coverage. See “New Vehicle Limited Warranty” for more details. Have vehicle checked by a dealer’s service cen‐ ter or another qualified service center or repair shop before and after driving on a racetrack. 219 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Loading DRIVING TIPS Loading Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Safety information Warning Unexpected movements of the rear seat back‐ rest while driving may occur due to uninten‐ tional unlocking of the rear seat backrests by the straps. There is a risk of injury. Only use straps for releasing the rear seat backrests. Do not attach objects on the straps. Warning Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and eva‐ sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly. Warning High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐ age them internally and cause a sudden drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐ bility, lengthening the braking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐ mitted gross weight. Warning Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ terior. NOTICE Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that no flu‐ ids leak in the cargo area. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐ hicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 220 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Loading 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐ sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐ ble cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐ hicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. DRIVING TIPS ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle. ▷ The cargo area, refer to page 207, can be ex‐ panded to transport large or bulky cargo. ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests. ▷ Smaller and light cargo: secure with ratchet straps or draw straps. ▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo straps. Lashing eyes in the cargo area Load There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for securing cargo. The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported. Stowing and securing cargo ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. With cargo area partition net or ski and snow‐ board bag: to secure the cargo there are six lash‐ ing eyes in the cargo area. Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area. 221 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Loading DRIVING TIPS Roof-mounted luggage rack General information Installation only possible with roof rack. Roof racks are available as special accessories. ▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance using ratchet straps. ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening path of the tailgate. ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐ tion and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently. Safety information Warning When driving with a roof load, for instance with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐ ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐ tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dynamic Stability Control when driving with roof load. Mounting Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack. Loading Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight. ▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐ tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐ roof. ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly. ▷ The roof load should not extend past the loading area. ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐ tom. 222 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption Vehicle features and options Close the windows and glass sunroof This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and thereby re‐ duces the range. General information The vehicle contains advanced technologies for the reduction of consumption and emission val‐ ues. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ ferent factors. Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐ ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐ fluence fuel consumption and the environmental impact. Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Remove attached parts following use Remove roof-mounted which are no longer re‐ quired following use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐ namics and increase the fuel consumption. Tires General information Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for instance tire size may influence consumption. Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before start‐ ing on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear. Drive away immediately Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the quickest way of warming the cold en‐ gine up to operating temperature. Look well ahead when driving Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. 223 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you. Avoid high engine speeds Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐ sumption and reduces wear. If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐ cator, refer to page 129. Use coasting When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐ ator and let the vehicle roll. The fuel supply is interrupted while coasting. Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐ dow defroster require a lot of energy and reduce the range, especially in city and stop-and-go traf‐ fic. Switch off these functions if they are not needed. The ECO PRO drive mode supports the energy conserving use of comfort features. These func‐ tions are automatically deactivated partially or completely. Have maintenance carried out Switch off the engine during longer stops Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW recommends that maintenance work be per‐ formed by a BMW service center. Switching off the engine For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐ tem, refer to page 262. Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐ stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic jam. ECO PRO Auto Start/Stop function Concept The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle auto‐ matically switches off the engine during a stop. ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on consumption. For this purpose, the engine con‐ trol and comfort features, for instance the climate control output, are adjusted. If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running con‐ stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐ duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds of switching off the engine. In addition, fuel consumption is also determined by other factors, such as driving style, road con‐ ditions, maintenance or environmental factors. In addition, context-sensitive instructions are dis‐ played to assist with an efficient driving style. The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range. General information The system includes the following EfficientDynamics functions and EfficientDynamics displays: 224 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Reducing fuel consumption ▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 226. ▷ Activate/deactivate the display, refer to page 226. DRIVING TIPS Activating/deactivating the functions ▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to page 225. The following functions can be activated/deacti‐ vated: ▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to page 227. ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning" ▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 228. ▷ "ECO PRO climate control" ▷ "Coasting" Overview Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used. ECO PRO limit speed ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning": activate ECO PRO speed. An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded. ▷ "Tip at:" Driving Dynamics Control Activating ECO PRO Press the button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐ Set the desired speed for the ECO PRO speed. ECO PRO climate control "ECO PRO climate control" Climate control is set to be efficient. Configuring ECO PRO This means, it is possible to deviate slightly from the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's interior more slowly, to economize on consump‐ tion. Via the Driving Dynamics Control In addition, the power output of the seat and mir‐ ror heating is reduced. ter. 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" Coasting 3. Select the desired setting. Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the engine and coasting with the engine idling. Via iDrive Deactivate the function to use the braking effect of the engine when traveling downhill. 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Driving mode" 4. "Configure ECO PRO" ECO PRO potential savings Shows potential savings with the current settings in percentages. 5. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the profile currently used. 225 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS Display in the instrument cluster ECO PRO bonus range A modified driving style helps you extend your driving distance. The range extension can be dis‐ played as the bonus range in the instrument cluster. 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "ECO PRO info" ECO PRO tip, symbols An additional icon and text instructions are dis‐ played. Icon Measure For efficient driving, accelerate more moderately or decelerate proactively to allow time to assess road conditions. The bonus range is shown in the range display. The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled. Reduce speed to the selected ECO PRO speed. ECO PRO efficiency display Steptronic transmission: The color of the ECO PRO displays in the instru‐ ment cluster tell you how efficiently you are driv‐ ing: Switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions. ▷ Blue display: efficient driving style. ▷ Gray display: modify driving style, for example by backing off the accelerator pedal. The display switches to blue as soon as all con‐ ditions for efficient driving are met. Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the ECO PRO displays also inform you about your current driving style. This is indicated by a pointer which moves along a scale. The pointer tells you whether energy is being consumed to accelerate the vehicle or whether energy is being recovered through coasting or braking. If the pointer remains in the blue range on the scale, you are driving efficiently. Indications on the Control Display Displaying EfficientDynamics information The current efficiency of the ECO PRO functions can be displayed on the Control Display. Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "EfficientDynamics" 4. Select the icon. ECO PRO tip, driving tip The following functions are displayed: The ECO PRO tip indicates that your driving style can be modified to be more efficient, for example by backing off the accelerator. ▷ Auto Start/Stop function. Activating/deactivating the display ▷ Energy recovery. ▷ Coasting. Displaying consumption history 1. "My Vehicle" The average consumption can be displayed on the Control Display. 2. "iDrive settings" Via iDrive: 3. "Displays" 226 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS 1. "My Vehicle" General information 2. "Technology in action" Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO drive mode. 3. "EfficientDynamics" 4. Select the icon. Vertical bars show consumption for the selected time frame. Adjusting the consumption history time frame 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "EfficientDynamics" 4. 5. Select the icon. Press the button. 6. Adjust the time frame. Resetting consumption history 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "EfficientDynamics" 4. 5. Select the icon. Press the button. 6. "Reset consumption history" Coasting Coasting is automatically activated when ECO PRO drive mode is called via the Driving Dynam‐ ics Control. A proactive driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and supports the efficient effect of coasting. Functional requirements The function is available in the speed range from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to 100 mph/160 km/h. The function is active if the following conditions are met: ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal not de‐ pressed. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position D. ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating temperature. ▷ With a camera in the area of the interior mir‐ ror: the system does not detect any vehicles ahead of you. ▷ With the route-ahead assistant: the system does not detect any obstructive traffic situa‐ tions or routes. Operation via shift paddles Concept Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐ cally decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce con‐ sumption. Selector lever position D remains en‐ gaged. This driving condition is referred to as coasting. As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again. Concept Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the coasting mode can be influenced with the shift paddles. Activating/deactivating coasting via shift paddles 1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right shift paddle. 2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right shift paddle again. 227 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle. Display Driving style analysis Concept Display in the instrument cluster The tachometer shows the idle speed. The function helps develop an especially effi‐ cient driving style and to conserve fuel. The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in blue and is located at the zero point. The coast‐ ing point indicator is illuminated at the zero point during coasting. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display. This display will help you adjust your driving style and save some fuel. Indications on the Control Display The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated. The coasting mode is displayed in EfficientDynamics while driving. The range of the vehicle can be extended by adopting an efficient driving style. The distance traveled in coasting mode is shown in the consumption history. The counter is reset prior to every departure. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Dis‐ play. Displaying EfficientDynamics information Functional requirement Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" Calling up ECO PRO Driving style analysis 2. "Technology in action" 3. "EfficientDynamics" 4. This function is available in ECO PRO drive mode. Via iDrive: Select the icon. 1. "My Vehicle" System limits 2. "Technology in action" The function is not available if one of the follow‐ ing conditions applies: 3. "Driving style analysis" ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated. Display on the Control Display ▷ If cruise control is activated. ▷ If driving in the dynamic limit range. ▷ If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ If the battery charge state is temporarily too low. ▷ If the vehicle electrical system is drawing ex‐ cessive current. The display of the ECO PRO Driving style analy‐ sis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup table. 228 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driving style. The more efficient your driving style, the smoother the depicted route becomes, arrow 1. The table of values contains stars. The more effi‐ cient the driving style, the more stars are in‐ cluded in the table and the faster the bonus range increases, arrow 2. If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐ cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number of stars are displayed. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO PRO tips are displayed during driving. Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Saving fuel, refer to page 223. 229 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Refueling MOBILITY Refueling Vehicle features and options Fuel cap This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens. Opening General information Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to page 232, prior to refueling. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. Safety information NOTICE With a driving distance of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Re‐ fuel promptly. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. 230 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Refueling Closing MOBILITY Safety information Warning NOTICE The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐ med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐ not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ age to property. Pay attention that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap. Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Avoid overfilling. 1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. 2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages. Emergency unlocking It may be necessary in certain situations to un‐ lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with an electrical fault. Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. Follow the following when refueling General information When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: ▷ Premature switching off. ▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐ ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning light may light up. Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐ tion. 231 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Fuel MOBILITY Fuel Vehicle features and options Safety information NOTICE This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐ tem and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic converter is permanently damaged. There is a risk of damage to property, among other poten‐ tial damage. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines: Fuel recommendation Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐ ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. General information Depending on the region, many gas stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐ ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier. Gasoline General information For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ taining metal must not be used. Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling. Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ dards: US: ASTM 4806–xx CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx ▷ Leaded gasoline. ▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese or iron. NOTICE Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty, among other potential damage. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to M100. NOTICE Fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality can compromise engine function or cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property, among other potential dam‐ age. Do not fill with fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality. xx: comply with the current standard in each case. 232 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Fuel MOBILITY CAUTION The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐ ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur. If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐ gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐ chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for additional mainte‐ nance. Recommended fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 91. M Performance model: BMW recommends AKI 93. Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated performance and consumption values. Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89. If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life. 233 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Wheels and tires Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Tire inflation pressure specifications In the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 235, contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐ facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. Tire inflation pressure ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed. General information Checking the tire inflation pressure The tire inflation pressure and tire characteristics influence the following: ▷ The service life of the tires. ▷ Road safety. ▷ Driving comfort. General information Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation pressure increases with the tire temperature. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐ tion pressure. ▷ Driving dynamics. The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi. ▷ Fuel consumption. Safety information Warning A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling, such as steering and braking re‐ sponse. There is a risk of accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐ fore a long trip. Checking using tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐ bient temperature. Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.: ▷ Driving distance of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded. ▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip. 234 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and correct it as needed. Tire pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h 1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires. X2 sDrive28i, X2 xDrive28i 2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for example. Tire size 3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual tire inflation pressure deviates from the in‐ tended tire inflation pressure. Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto the tire valves. After correcting the tire inflation pressure For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires. For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the tire inflation pressure values in the tire inflation pressure ta‐ ble, refer to page 235, and adjust as necessary. 225/50 R 18 95 V A/S Pressure specifications in bar/PSI 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32 2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36 225/40 R 20 94 Y XL 2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39 Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h T 115/95 R 17 95 M 4.2 / 60 225/50 R 18 95 H M+S 225/45 R 19 96 Y XL 225/45 R 19 96 H XL A/S 205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S 225/45 R 19 96 W XL 225/45 R 19 96 V XL M+S These tire inflation pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar. Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h. 235 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY X2 M35i Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/45 R 19 96 Y 2.5 / 36 XL X2 sDrive28i, X2 xDrive28i Without high-speed tuning feature Tire size 2.5 / 36 225/45 R 19 96 H XL A/S Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/50 R 18 95 V A/S 225/45 R 19 96 W XL 2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41 225/50 R 18 95 H M+S 205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S 225/45 R 19 96 Y XL 225/45 R 19 96 V XL M+S 225/40 R 20 94 Y 2.7 / 39 XL Tire pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h 2.7 / 39 Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 225/45 R 19 96 H XL A/S 205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S 225/45 R 19 96 V XL M+S 225/40 R 20 94 Y XL Warning In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐ ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur. Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h T 115/95 R 17 95 M 4.2 / 60 With high-speed tuning feature For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐ mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 236, and adjust as necessary. 236 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/50 R 18 95 V A/S Tire size MOBILITY Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/45 R 19 96 Y XL 2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36 225/50 R 18 95 H M+S 225/45 R 19 96 H XL A/S 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41 225/45 R 19 96 H XL A/S 205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S 225/45 R 19 96 Y XL 225/45 R 19 96 V XL M+S 205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S 225/40 R 20 94 Y XL 225/45 R 19 96 W XL 2.8 / 41 3.1 / 45 2.8 / 41 3.1 / 45 With high-speed tuning feature 225/45 R 19 96 V XL M+S Tire size 225/40 R 20 94 Y XL Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 115/95 R 17 95 M 4.2 / 60 X2 M35i Without high-speed tuning feature Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 225/45 R 19 96 Y XL 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41 3.1 / 45 3.1 / 45 205/55 R 18 96 H XL M+S 225/45 R 19 96 W XL 225/45 R 19 96 V XL M+S 225/40 R 20 94 Y XL 237 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Tire identification marks xxx: tire size and tire design Tire size Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation. 245/45 R 18 96 Y 245: nominal width in mm 0121: tire age Tire age 45: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code Recommendation 18: rim diameter in inches Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least every 6 years. 96: load rating, not for ZR tires Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires Manufacture date Maximum tire load You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire's sidewall. Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on the certification label on the driver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively. Speed letter Designation Maximum speed Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h R up to 106 mph/170 km/h S up to 112 mph/180 km/h T up to 118 mph/190 km/h H up to 131 mph/210 km/h V up to 150 mph/240 km/h W up to 167 mph/270 km/h Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h Tire Identification Number DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0121 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand Designation Manufacture date DOT … 0121 1st week 2021 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐ eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and 238 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfa‐ ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐ planing, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐ sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐ ance which all passenger car tires must meet un‐ der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐ lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in com‐ bination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. MOBILITY RSC – Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 242, are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall. M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires. Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased risk of hydroplaning. Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter operation. Minimum tread depth Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required min‐ imum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm. The positions of the wear indicators are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐ tor. 239 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Tire damage ported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced. General information Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐ pension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐ pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐ file tires. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐ functions: ▷ Unusual vibrations. ▷ Unusual tire or running noises. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right. Damage can be caused by the following situa‐ tions, for instance: Warning Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐ stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire crosssection. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐ ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐ ble, avoid driving over objects or road condi‐ tions that may damage tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully. Changing wheels and tires Mounting Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Wheel and tire combination ▷ Driving over curbs. ▷ Road damage. ▷ Tire inflation pressure too low. General information ▷ Vehicle overloading. You can ask the dealer's service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop about the correct wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle. ▷ Incorrect tire storage. Safety information Safety information Warning Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or trans‐ Warning Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐ stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐ erances despite the same official size rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐ turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recom‐ 240 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type. MOBILITY Retreaded tires Warning Warning Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a negative impact on the vehicle's handling and on the function of a variety of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Braking System or DSC Dy‐ namic Stability Control. There is a risk of acci‐ dent. To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread con‐ figuration from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you use wheels and tires that have been rec‐ ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible. Recommended tire brands Retreaded tires can have different tire casing structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ ommend the use of retreaded tires. The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec‐ ommend the use of retreaded tires. Winter tires Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads. Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they usually do not provide the same level of perform‐ ance as winter tires. Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐ mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐ able from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed. For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐ cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. New tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. Changing runflat tires When changing from run-flat tires to standard tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle contains a compact spare tire ("donut") or tire mobility kit. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Rotating wheels between axles Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐ tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐ 241 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY formation is available from a dealer's service cen‐ ter or another qualified service center or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed. Storing tires Tire inflation pressure Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. Safety information Warning The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ stance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐ cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Storage ▷ Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place. Label ▷ Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents. ▷ Do not leave tires in plastic bags. ▷ Remove dirt from wheels or tires. Run-flat tires Concept Run-flat tires permit continued driving under re‐ stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐ plete loss of tire inflation pressure. General information The wheels consist of tires that are self-support‐ ing, to a limited degree, and possibly special rims. The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with RSC Run-flat System Component. Repairing a flat tire Safety measures ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐ main drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire. ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock. ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake. ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐ hicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐ hind a guardrail. 242 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance. MOBILITY Overview Storage Mobility System Concept With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside. General information ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility System found on the compressor and sealant container. ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐ tive if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more. The Mobility System is located behind the left side trim in the cargo area. Sealant container ▷ Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable. ▷ Do not remove foreign bodies that have pe‐ netrated the tire. Only remove foreign objects if they are visibly protruding from the tire. ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel. ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the TPM wheel electronics replaced at the next oppor‐ tunity. ▷ Sealant container, arrow 1. ▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. Observe use-by date on the sealant container. Compressor ▷ The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure. 1 Sealant container unlocking 2 Sealant container holder 243 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY 3 Tire pressure gage 4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button 2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of the sealant container. Do not kink the hose. 5 On/off switch 6 Compressor 7 Connector/cable for socket 8 Connection hose Filling the tire with sealant Safety information 3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on the compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐ gages audibly. DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐ sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐ tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐ closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐ late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐ ficient ventilation. NOTICE The compressor can overheat during extended operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty, among other potential damage. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes. 4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel. Filling 1. Shake the sealant container. 244 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires 5. With the compressor switched off, insert the connector into the power socket in the vehi‐ cle interior. MOBILITY Removing and stowing the sealant container 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐ tainer from the tire valve. 2. Press the red unlocking device. 3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐ pressor. 4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suita‐ ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area. 6. With the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor. Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached 1. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior. 2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐ ute the sealant in the tire. 3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ sor directly onto the tire valve stem. Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.0 bar. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point. 4. Insert the connector into the power socket in the vehicle interior. Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure Checking 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire pressure gage. To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached. 5. With the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor. 245 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar can‐ not be reached, contact your dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 3. Insert the connector into the power socket in the vehicle interior. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached. 6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ pressor from the tire valve. 7. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior. 8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ pressor from the tire valve. 2. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior. 3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. 4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h. 4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least 2.0 bar. ▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with the ig‐ nition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor. ▷ To reduce the pressure: press the button on the compressor. 5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ pressor from the tire valve. 6. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior. 7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Adjustment Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. 1. Stop at a suitable location. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. 2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ sor directly onto the tire valve stem. Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant con‐ tainer of the Mobility System at the next opportu‐ nity. 246 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires Tire chains Safety information Warning With the mounting of tire chains on unsuitable tires, the tire chains can come into contact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only mount tire chains on tires that are designated by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of tire chains. MOBILITY Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐ ter mounting tire chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with tire chains, briefly activate Dy‐ namic Traction Control DTC, if needed. Maximum speed with tire chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using tire chains. Changing wheels/tires General information Warning Insufficiently tight tire chains may damage tires and vehicle components. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the tire chains are always sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to the tire chain manufacturer's instructions. Fine-link tire chains The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends the use of fine-link tire chains. Certain types of fine-link tire chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable. Information regarding suitable tire chains is avail‐ able from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel does not always need to be changed immedi‐ ately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure due to a flat tire. If needed, the tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. Safety information DANGER The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety measures are observed, there is a risk of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine. Use Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: ▷ 205/55 R 18. Follow the tire chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting tire chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. DANGER Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐ hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle jack to bear weight. They have the potential to exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐ ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is 247 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 MOBILITY Wheels and tires a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle jack. Warning The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐ signed for frequent use; for example, changing from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐ quently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown. Warning On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐ sistant surface. Warning A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐ ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Securing the vehicle against rolling General information The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐ tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away when changing a wheel. On a level surface Warning The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐ cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack. Warning When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐ hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in‐ serted in the jacking point next to the wheel housing. Place chocks or other suitable objects, for exam‐ ple rocks, in front of and behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that you wish to change. 248 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires On a slight downhill gradient MOBILITY 3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug bolt. Screwing on 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐ sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug bolt. 2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque is 140 Nm. If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐ hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐ jects, for instance rocks, under the wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling direction. 3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐ ing on the lug bolt. Preparing the vehicle ▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from traffic. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. Lug bolt lock ▷ Set the parking brake. Concept The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The lug bolts can only be released with the adapter which matches the coding. Overview The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit. ▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P. ▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the im‐ mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. ▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐ able hazard warning light at an appropriate distance. ▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling. ▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn. ▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1. ▷ Adapter, arrow 2. Unscrewing 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. 2. Unscrew the lug bolt. 249 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Jacking points for the vehicle jack The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ cated at the indicated positions. Jacking up the vehicle 1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank with your other hand, arrow 2. 2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐ cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed. Warning Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐ ply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the vehicle jack. 3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise. 4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load and continue turning the vehicle jack crank or lever with one hand. 250 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires 5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and at a right angle beneath the jacking point. MOBILITY 5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐ cle. 6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely. After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐ ing torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm. 2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area, if necessary. 6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly beneath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack. The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐ der the cargo floor panel because of its size. 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐ portunity and correct as needed. 4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. 5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench. 6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐ est dealer's service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop. 7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is with the entire surface on the ground and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground. Mounting a wheel Mount one emergency wheel only, as required. 1. Unscrew the lug bolts. 2. Remove the wheel. 3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐ wise pattern until hand-tight. If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the accompany‐ ing lug bolts may have to be used as well. Emergency wheel Concept In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel can be used in place of the wheel with the defec‐ tive tire. The emergency wheel is only intended for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel has been replaced. General information Mount one emergency wheel only. Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and correct it as needed. 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐ tern. 251 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Safety information Inserting the emergency wheel 1. Insert the emergency wheel on the left and slide it to the right. Warning The emergency wheel has particular dimen‐ sions. When driving with an emergency wheel, changed driving properties may occur, for in‐ stance reduced lane stability when braking, lon‐ ger braking distance, and changed self-steering properties in the limit area. There is a risk of ac‐ cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 2. Where applicable, mount the holder and the trailer hitch. 3. Attach the retaining plate or the cover. 4. Screw on and tighten the butterfly screw. 5. Insert and secure the jacking point and the tool holder on the left next to the emergency wheel. 6. Insert the cargo floor panel. Overview The emergency wheel and the wheel change tools are located in the cargo area under the cargo floor panel. Removing the emergency wheel 1. Pull up and remove the cargo floor panel. 2. Unscrew the butterfly screw. 3. Remove the retaining plate or the cover. 4. Where applicable, remove the holder and the trailer hitch. 5. Remove the jacking point and the tool holder on the left next to the emergency wheel. 6. Slide the emergency wheel to the left and re‐ move it. 252 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Engine compartment MOBILITY Engine compartment Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Overview 1 Filler neck for washer fluid 4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 2 Vehicle identification number 5 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 3 Oil filler neck 6 Coolant reservoir 253 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 MOBILITY Engine compartment Hood Warning Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is clear during opening and closing. Safety information Warning Improperly executed work in the engine com‐ partment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Have work in the engine compartment performed by a deal‐ er’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. NOTICE Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood. Warning The engine compartment accommodates mov‐ ing components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐ ing and hair away from moving parts. Warning There are protruding parts, for instance locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas. NOTICE When the hood is closed, it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again. Opening the hood 1. Pull lever, arrow 1. Hood is unlocked. Warning An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐ ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of acci‐ dent. Stop immediately and correctly close the hood. 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened. 254 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Engine compartment MOBILITY Indicator/warning lights When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control message is displayed. Closing the hood Energetically close the hood from approx. 20 in/50 cm. The hood must engage on both sides. 255 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 MOBILITY Engine oil Engine oil Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on your driving style and driving conditions. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐ ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement. The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations, for instance: ▷ Sporty driving style. Safety information NOTICE An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐ gine damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Im‐ mediately add engine oil. NOTICE Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property, among other potential dam‐ age. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Electronic oil measurement General information ▷ Break-in of the engine. ▷ Idling of the engine. ▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified as not suitable. Different Check Control messages appear on the Control Display depending on the engine oil level. The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐ ing principles: ▷ Monitoring. ▷ Detailed measurement. When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, for instance when taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a detailed measurement. Monitoring Concept The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and can be shown on the Control Display. 256 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Engine oil If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed. A red indicator light indicates that the en‐ gine oil pressure is too low. Functional requirements A current measured value is available after ap‐ prox. 30 minutes of normal driving. Displaying the engine oil level MOBILITY ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐ lector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed. ▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐ ature. Performing a detailed measurement Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level" Via iDrive: 4. "Measure engine oil level" 1. "My Vehicle" 5. "Start measurement" 2. "Vehicle status" The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. 3. "Engine oil level" The engine oil level is displayed. System limits Adding engine oil When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, it may not be pos‐ sible to calculate a measured value. In this case, the measured value for the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed. General information Detailed measurement Only add suitable types of engine oil. Concept Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition before adding engine oil. Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message displayed in the instrument cluster. The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle is stationary and displayed via a scale. Take care not to add too much engine oil. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed. Safety information General information During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ creased somewhat. Functional requirements ▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. Warning Operating materials, for instance oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐ low the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children. 257 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Engine oil MOBILITY Only add the types of engine oil which are listed. NOTICE An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐ gine damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Im‐ mediately add engine oil. NOTICE Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property, among other potential dam‐ age. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Overview The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐ partment, refer to page 253. Safety information NOTICE Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property, among other poten‐ tial damage. Do not use oil additives. NOTICE Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property, among other potential dam‐ age. When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil rating. Suitable engine oil types Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards: Adding engine oil Gasoline engine 1. Open the hood, refer to page 254. BMW Longlife-17 FE+. 2. Open the lid counterclockwise. Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added: Oil rating API SL. API SM. 3. Add engine oil. API SN. 4. Close the lid. Viscosity grades Engine oil types to add General information Viscosity grades SAE 0W-20. The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. 258 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Engine oil MOBILITY More information about suitable oil ratings and viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop. Engine oil change NOTICE Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐ gine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. It is recommended that you do not exceed the service intervals indicated in the ve‐ hicle. The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop change the en‐ gine oil. 259 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Coolant MOBILITY Coolant Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. General information or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives only. Coolant level Checking There are yellow Min and Max marks in the cool‐ ant reservoir. 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Open the hood. 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ sure to dissipate, then open it. Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suita‐ ble for the vehicle. Do not mix additives of differ‐ ent colors. Observe the water - additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable addi‐ tives is available from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Safety information Warning With the engine hot and the cooling system open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down. 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. 5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck. 6. Close the lid. Adding coolant 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Open the hood. Warning Additives are harmful and incorrect additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes 260 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Coolant MOBILITY 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ sure to dissipate, then open it. 4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. 5. Close the lid. 6. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible. Disposal Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives. 261 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Maintenance MOBILITY Maintenance Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. BMW maintenance system The maintenance system provides service notifi‐ cations and thereby provides support in main‐ taining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle. In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐ tenance system may vary according to the coun‐ try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐ ice center or repair shop. Condition Based Service CBS Concept Sensors and special algorithms take into account the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses these to provide maintenance recommendations. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile. General information Information on service notifications, refer to page 128, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. Service data in the vehicle key Information on the service notifications is contin‐ uously stored in the vehicle key. The service center can read this data out and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle. Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle key with which the vehicle was driven most re‐ cently. Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account. If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐ dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐ sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter. Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on the performance of service and maintenance work. 262 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Maintenance The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained. MOBILITY Position Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis General information Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐ move any devices connected at the OBD socket before locking the vehicle. Safety information There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi‐ cle's emissions. Emissions ▷ The warning light lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. NOTICE The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐ cate component intended to be used in con‐ junction with specialized equipment to check the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐ proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐ sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐ agnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property damage. Given the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for pur‐ poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐ board Diagnosis. ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ cumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐ ously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter. 263 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 MOBILITY Replacing components Replacing components Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Wiper blades Safety information NOTICE The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade in‐ stalled. Vehicle tool kit Depending on the vehicle equipment, the on‐ board vehicle tool kit is located: ▷ Without emergency wheel: behind the left cover in the cargo area. NOTICE Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood. Replacing the front wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper arms, refer to page 109. 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. ▷ With emergency wheel: in the box under the cargo floor panel. 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and swing out the wiper blade, arrow 2. 264 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Replacing components MOBILITY 4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade must engage audibly. Follow the safety information, refer to page 265. 5. Fold down the wiper arm. Safety information Replacing the rear wiper blade Lights and bulbs 1. Lift the wiper up fully and pull off the wiper blade, arrow. Warning Bulbs can get hot during operation. Contact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off. Warning 2. Position the new wiper blade and press it on until it you hear it snap into place. 3. Fold the wipers in. Work on switched-on lighting systems can cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When working on the lighting system, switch off the lights in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐ turer's instructions. Light and bulb replacement NOTICE General information Lights and bulbs Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have the relevant work carried out a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. A spare light box is available from a dealer's serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Follow the safety information, refer to page 265. Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is a risk of damage to property, among other po‐ tential damage. Do not hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth or some‐ thing similar, or hold the bulb by its base. Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Warning Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources. Do not remove the LED covers. Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐ odes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐ ventional lasers and are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Headlight glass Condensation can form on the inside of the headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐ 265 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 MOBILITY Replacing components sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ light glass does not need to be changed. Tail lights, bulb replacement If despite driving with the headlights switched on, increasing humidity forms, for instance water droplets in the light, have the headlights checked. Overview Headlight setting The headlight settings can be affected by chang‐ ing lights and bulbs. After the headlight setting was changed, have it checked and, if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 1 Tail light/side marker light Front lights, bulb replacement 2 Turn signal 3 Reversing light LED headlights 4 Inside brake light Follow the safety information, refer to page 265. 5 Tail lights All bulbs and lights are made using LED technol‐ ogy. 6 Brake light In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. The tail light and brake lights feature LED tech‐ nology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐ ice center or repair shop. Turn signal in exterior mirror The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Bulb replacement, exterior tail lights General information Follow the safety information, refer to page 265. Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL. Removing the exterior tail light 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Remove the fastening using the screw driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, arrow 1. 266 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Replacing components Remove cover, arrow 2. MOBILITY 3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Installing the tail light 1. Connect the plug and mount the wiring on the tail light, arrow 1. 2. Place the tail light with the tabs, arrows 2, on the anchors of the body and push onto both of the threaded bolts. 3. Loosen both nuts, arrow 1, of the outer tail light. Use the handle of the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen. Carefully pull out the tail light from the body toward the front, arrow 2. Ensure that the wir‐ ing is not damaged. 3. Press on the tail lights until flush and tighten both of the nuts. 4. Mount the cover. Make sure that the plastic tabs of the cover are correctly seated in the corresponding recesses of the body. Lights in the tailgate 4. Pull the connector out of the bulb holder and have the tail light wiring hang outside. General Follow the safety information, refer to page 265. Replacing the bulbs Reversing light: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL 1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove. Inner brake light: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL Accessing the lights 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 267 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Replacing components MOBILITY 2. Pull out the cover at the recessed grip. These lights are made using LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Vehicle battery General information The battery is maintenance-free. 3. Remove the connector from the bulb holder. Replacing reversing light and inner brake light 1. Loosen the fasteners, arrow 1, on the bulb holder. Remove the bulb holder from the tail light, ar‐ row 2. More information about the battery can be re‐ quested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Safety information DANGER Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ ger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage. Warning 2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. ▷ Upper bulb: reversing light ▷ Lower bulb: inner brake light Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be installed in your vehicle. Information on com‐ patible vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s service center. Installing the bulb holder 1. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Connect the connector to the bulb holder. 2. Make sure that the bulb holder is correctly and firmly seated. Central brake light and license plate lights Follow the safety information, refer to page 265. Register the battery to the vehicle The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have a service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop register the ve‐ hicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been replaced. Once the battery has been regis‐ tered again, all comfort features will be available without restriction and any Check Control mes‐ 268 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Replacing components sages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear. Charging the battery General information Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life. A discharged battery is indicated by a red indicator light. Charge the battery when acceleration is insuffi‐ cient. The following circumstances can have a negative effect on the performance of the battery: ▷ Frequent short-distance drives. ▷ The vehicle is not used for more than a month. MOBILITY ▷ Time: update. ▷ Date: update. ▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system. Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐ er’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point. Maintain the filled battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport. Fuses Safety information Warning Safety information NOTICE Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt electrical system can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property, among other potential dam‐ age. Only connect battery chargers for the ve‐ hicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment. Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐ trical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating. Accessing the fuses The fuses are located in the glove compartment. 1. Open the glove compartment. 2. Swing the cover down, arrow. Charging the battery Charge the battery only when the engine is off and via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 274, in the engine compartment. Power failure After a power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example: ▷ Memory function: store the positions again. Information on the fuse types and locations, as well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is 269 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 MOBILITY Replacing components available on the Internet: www.bmw.com/fuse‐ card. Where applicable, information on the fuse types and locations is also found on a separate sheet in the fuse box. Replacing fuses The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop replace the fuses. 270 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Breakdown assistance MOBILITY Breakdown assistance Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Hazard warning flashers Warning triangle The warning triangle is located on the inside of the tailgate. Move the warning triangle sideways and remove it. First-aid kit General information Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐ larly and replace any expired items promptly. The button is located in the center console. The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐ ard warning flashers are activated. Storage Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in the cargo area, if applicable under the cargo area floor. 271 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Breakdown assistance MOBILITY BMW Roadside Assistance portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is trans‐ mitted automatically. Concept Teleservice Help Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance if assistance is needed in the event of a break‐ down. Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle via wireless transmission. General information You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it through the Service Specialist. In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐ cle's condition is sent to the vehicle manufac‐ turer. 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Set the parking brake. There are various ways of making contact. 3. Control Display is switched on. ▷ Via a Check Control message, refer to page 126. 4. Confirm Teleservice Help. ▷ Calling with a mobile phone. ▷ Via the BMW Connected app. Requirements ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐ nectedDrive services. ▷ Cellular network reception. ▷ The ignition is switched on. The driving ability of the vehicle can be restored for specific functions. If this is not possible, further measures will be ini‐ tiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will be informed. Emergency Call Intelligent emergency call Concept Starting If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sup‐ port is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis. In case of an emergency, an emergency call can be triggered automatically by the system or man‐ ually. Via iDrive: General information 1. "ConnectedDrive" Only press the SOS button in an emergency. 2. "BMW Assist" 3. "BMW Roadside Assistance" The contact to the Roadside Assistance of the manufacture is established. A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone. Intelligent emergency call establishes a connec‐ tion with the BMW Response Center. For technical reasons, the Emergency Call can‐ not be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions. Teleservice Diagnosis Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐ 272 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Breakdown assistance Overview MOBILITY Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstances. For this purpose, data that serves to deter‐ mine the necessary rescue measures, for in‐ stance the current position of the vehicle when it can be determined, is transmitted to the BMW Response Center. SOS button in the roofliner. Functional requirements ▷ The Assist system is functional. ▷ The ignition is switched on. ▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent emergency call: the SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated. Automatic triggering Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐ bags trigger, an emergency call is automatically initiated immediately after an accident of corre‐ sponding severity. Automatic Collision Notifica‐ tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button. Even if you can no longer hear the BMW Re‐ sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the BMW Response Center may still be able to hear you. The BMW Response Center ends the emer‐ gency call. Jump-starting General information If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles. Safety information DANGER Manual triggering 1. Tap the cover. 2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED on the button illuminates green. Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ ger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage. ▷ The LED is illuminated green when an emer‐ gency call has been initiated. If a cancel prompt appears on the Control Display, the emergency call can be aborted. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been established. ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been estab‐ lished. Warning If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐ rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐ ing connection. The BMW Response Center then makes contact with you and takes further steps to help you. 273 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Breakdown assistance MOBILITY or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle. NOTICE In the case of body contact between the two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jumpstarting. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that no body contact occurs. 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐ ative battery terminal, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started. Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine. Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐ cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐ formation can be found on the battery. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way. 3. Switch off any electrical components in both vehicles. Starting aid terminals The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐ ment, refer to page 253, acts as the positive bat‐ tery terminal. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. A special connection on the body in the engine compartment, refer to page 253, acts as the negative battery terminal. Connecting the cables To prevent personal injury or damage to both ve‐ hicles, adhere strictly to the following procedure. 1. Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid termi‐ nal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive battery terminal, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance. 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive battery terminal, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative battery terminal, If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another at‐ tempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge. 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order. Check the battery and recharge, if needed. Tow-starting and towing Safety information Warning Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. Steptronic transmission without xDrive: transporting the vehicle General information The vehicle must not be towed if the front wheels are touching the ground. 274 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Breakdown assistance MOBILITY Steptronic transmission with xDrive: transporting the vehicle Safety information NOTICE The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Have vehicle transported only with lifted front axle or on a loading platform. Pushing the vehicle To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐ ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance. For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 116. General information The vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Pushing the vehicle To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐ ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance. For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 116. Tow truck NOTICE The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it. Tow truck NOTICE The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. ▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. ▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. ▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. ▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform. Your vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. Towing other vehicles General information Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐ ing on local regulations. 275 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 MOBILITY Breakdown assistance If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window. Safety information ▷ Check the fastening of the tow fitting and tow rope in regular intervals. ▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h. ▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of 3 miles/5 km. Warning If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐ ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control the vehicle's response. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed. ▷ When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. Tow fitting General information NOTICE If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐ rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting. Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the fol‐ lowing: ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset. Tow rope Observe the following notes when using the tow rope: ▷ Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the vehicle to be towed without jerking. The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle. The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle. The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 264, are together in the cargo area. Use of the tow fitting: ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐ hicle and screw it all the way in. ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐ stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐ ting. ▷ Check the fastening of the tow fitting in regu‐ lar intervals. ▷ Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening. 276 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Breakdown assistance MOBILITY Safety information NOTICE If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐ ting. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting. Screw thread for tow fitting Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out. Tow-starting Steptronic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle. Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission. Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐ rected by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 277 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Care MOBILITY Care Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Washing the vehicle General information Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐ ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle. Steam blaster and high-pressure washer Safety information Distances and temperature ▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. ▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm. ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof: 31.5 in/80 cm. Automatic washing systems or car washes Safety information NOTICE Improper use of automatic washing systems or car washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Follow the following in‐ structions: ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. ▷ Do not drive through a car wash with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the chassis. ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims. ▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors. NOTICE When cleaning with high-pressure washers, components can be damaged due to the pres‐ sure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property, among other poten‐ tial damage. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the op‐ erating instructions for the high-pressure washer. ▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐ tem. 278 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Care Driving into a car wash with a Steptronic transmission MOBILITY Completely remove all residues on the windows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear. Safety information Vehicle care NOTICE Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ gaged when the ignition is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not switch ignition off in car washes. General information In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll freely. To roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 116. Some car washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A sig‐ nal sounds when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle. Driving out of a car wash Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. Start the engine. Starting the engine, refer to page 100. Headlights Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water. Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper. After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. Vehicle care products General information BMW recommends using vehicle care and cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care products are available from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. Safety information Warning Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐ gerous and harmful to your health. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products in‐ tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐ structions on the container. Vehicle paint General information Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your vehicle care to these influences. Corrosive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ mediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored. Matte finish Only use cleaning and care products suitable for vehicles with matte finish. 279 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 MOBILITY Care Leather care Caring for special components Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Light-alloy wheels Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather sur‐ face. When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. Upholstery material care General information Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐ age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐ terial vigorously. Safety information Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐ nents, such as the brake disc. After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to dry them. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with plenty of water, if nec‐ essary, with shampoo added, particularly when they have been exposed to road salt. Rubber components Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐ ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning. Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing vehicle care products in order to avoid damage or noises. Fine wood parts NOTICE Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed. Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth. 280 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Care Plastic components NOTICE Cleaning agents that contain alcohol or sol‐ vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel and such, can damage plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty, among other potential damage. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed. Do not soak the roofliner. Safety belts MOBILITY Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐ curely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning. Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐ rior for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐ crofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only. Sensor/camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐ gent. Displays/Screens/protective glass of the Head-up Display Warning Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the safety belts. Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety. Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if they are dry. Carpets and floor mats Warning Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. NOTICE Chemical cleaning agents, moisture or fluids of any kind can damage the surface of displays and screens. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty, among other potential damage. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. NOTICE The surface of displays can be damaged with improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐ play using a microfiber cloth and commercially available dish-washing soap. Long-term vehicle storage When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. 281 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 MOBILITY Care Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 282 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Care MOBILITY 283 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Technical data REFERENCE Technical data Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. General information The technical data and specifications in the Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for instance due to the selected special equip‐ ment, country version or country-specific meas‐ urement method. Detailed values can be found in the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-specific measurement method. racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐ stance due to the selected special equipment, tires, load and chassis version. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof BMW X2 Width with mirrors in/mm 82.6/2,098 Width without mirrors in/mm 71.8/1,824 Height in/mm 60.1/1,526 Length in/mm 172.2/4,374 Wheelbase in/mm 105.1/2,670 Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.1/11.3 284 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Technical data REFERENCE Weights X2 sDrive28i Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,597/2,085 Load lbs/kg 946/429 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,425/1,100 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,271/1,030 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,729/2,145 Load lbs/kg 915/415 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,447/1,110 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,381/1,080 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,795/2,175 Load lbs/kg 972/441 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,469/1,120 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,414/1,095 X2 xDrive28i X2 M35i powered by BMW M Capacities BMW X2 Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 16.1/61.0 Observe further information on fuel quality, refer to page 232. 285 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 REFERENCE Appendix Appendix Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐ cle are listed here. Updates made after the editorial deadline The following chapters were updated in the printed version of the Owner's Manual after the editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed: ▷ Operation: opening and closing: vehicle key: safety Instructions. ▷ Operation: opening and closing: vehicle key: change battery: note. ▷ Operation: seats, mirrors and steering wheel: seats and head restraints: safety belts: gen‐ eral. ▷ Mobility: wheels and tires: tire pressure: tire inflation pressure specifications: on the door pillar. 286 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Appendix REFERENCE 287 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 REFERENCE Everything from A to Z Everything from A to Z Index A ABS Antilock Braking System 164 ACC, Active Cruise Control 171 Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 120 Accessories and parts 8 Activated charcoal filter 197 Activation times, parked-car ventilation 198 Active Cruise Control, ACC 171 Adaptive chassis 169 Additives, engine oil types 258 Adjustments, steering wheel 92 Airbags 143 Airbags, indicator and warning light 145 Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 192 Air conditioner 191 air conditioning, climate 195 Air distribution, manual 193, 196 Air drying, see air conditioning 195 Air flow, air conditioner 193 Air flow, automatic climate control 196 Air outlets, see Ventilation 197 Air pressure, tires 234 Alarm system 76 Alarm, unintentional 77 All-season tires, see Winter tires 241 All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 166 Amazon Alexa Car Integration 44 Ambient light 142 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 113 Antilock Braking System ABS 164 Anti-slip control, see DSC 164 Anti-theft protection, lug bolt lock 249 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ tertainment, Communication 6 Arrival time 133 Ash tray 202 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off assis‐ tant 170 Assistance with breakdown 271 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communication 6 Automatic car wash 278 Automatic climate control 194 Automatic cruise control with Stop&Go func‐ tion 171 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 91 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐ bags 145 Automatic headlight control 139 Automatic locking 75 Automatic Recirculating Air Control 196 Automatic tailgate 70 Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans‐ mission 114 Automatic unlocking 76 AUTO program, automatic climate control 195 AUTO program, intensity 196 Auto Start/Stop function 101 Average consumption 132 Average speed 132 Axle loads, approved 285 B Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 83 Backrest, seats 82 Backrest, width 84 Bad road trips 216 Bad weather light 141 Battery, disposing of 269 Battery, vehicle 268 Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 274 Belts, see Safety belts 85 Beverage holder, see Cup holders 213 Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 79 Bluetooth connection 51 Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 288 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Everything from A to Z BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 BMW Homepage, see Internet 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW maintenance system 262 BMW Roadside Assistance 272 Bonus range, ECO PRO 226 Bottle holder, see Cup holders 213 Brake assistant 164 Brake discs, break-in 216 Brake pads, break-in 216 Braking, information 218 Breakdown assistance 271 Breaking in 216 Brightness, Control Display 48 Bulb replacement 265 Bulb replacement, front 266 Bulb replacement, rear 266 Bulbs and lights 265 Button, central locking system 65 Button, Hill Descent Control HDC 166 Buttons on the steering wheel 30 Button, Start/Stop 99 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 273 C California Proposition 65 Warning 8 Calling up mirror adjustment 75 Calling up seat adjustment 75 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐ gent Safety 153 Camera-based cruise control, ACC 171 Camera lenses, care 281 Camera, rearview camera 183 Can holder, see Cup holders 213 Care 278 Care, Head-up Display 281 Care, light-alloy wheels 280 Care of displays, screens 281 Care, vehicle 279 Cargo 220 Cargo area 207 Cargo area, enlarging 209 Cargo area, storage compartments 214 Cargo, stowing and securing 221 REFERENCE Carpet, care 281 Car wash 278 Car wash, automatic 278 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐ tem 217 CBS Condition Based Service 262 Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Center armrest 213 Center console 32 Central Information Display (CID), see Control Display 36 Central locking switch, see Central locking sys‐ tem 65 Central locking system 65 Central screen, see Control Display 36 Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 7 Changing parts 264 Changing wheels 247 Changing, wheels and tires 240 Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 205 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless charging tray 205 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐ ber 12 Check Control 123 Check engine oil level 256 Checking the engine oil level electronically 256 Checking the oil level electronically 256 Children, seating position 93 Children, transporting safely 93 Child restraint system 93 Child restraint system LATCH 95 Child restraint systems, mounting 94 Child safety locks 98 Child seat, mounting 94 Child seats 93 Chrome parts, care 280 Cigarette lighter 202 Cleaning displays, screens 281 Cleaning, Head-up Display 281 Clearance, water 218 Climate control 191, 194 Clothes hooks 214 Coasting 227 289 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 REFERENCE Everything from A to Z Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coast‐ ing 227 Coasting with idling engine 227 Combination switch, see Turn signals 105 Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys‐ tem 106, 109 Comfort Access 66 COMFORT program, driving dynamics 169 Communication, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 251 Compartments in the doors 212 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 50 Computer, see Trip computer 131 Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Condensation on windows 193, 197 Condensation under the vehicle 219 Condition Based Service CBS 262 Confirmation signal 75 Connect device 50 ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 202 Connections 50 Consumption history 226 Consumption, see Average consumption 132 Consumption, see Current consumption 127 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Continued driving with a flat tire 149, 153 Control Display 36 Control Display, brightness 48 Controller 36, 37 Control systems, driving stability 164 Convenient closing, vehicle key 62 Convenient opening, vehicle key 61 Coolant 260 Cooling, maximum 195 Cooling system 260 Cornering light 140 Corrosion on brake discs 219 Cosmetic mirror 202 Couple device, see Pair device 50 Courtesy lights during unlocking 61 Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 62 Cruise control 177 Cruise control, active 171 Cruise control with distance control, see Cam‐ era-based cruise control, ACC 171 Cruise control without distance control, see Cruise control 177 Cruising range 127 Cup holder 213 Current consumption 127 Customer service, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 D Damage, tires 240 Dashboard 30 Data protection, settings 49 Data, see Deleting personal data 49 Data, technical 284 Date 47 Date, display 127 Daytime running lights 140 DCC, see Cruise control 177 Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 193, 197 Deleting personal data 49 Departure schedule, see Pre-ventilation 198 Destination distance 133 Device list 50 Digital clock 127 Dimensions 284 Dimmable exterior mirrors 91 Dimmable interior mirror 91 Direct dial buttons, see Programmable memory buttons 40 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 105 Display, date 127 Display, engine temperature 132 Display, iDrive 34 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 141 Disposal, coolant 261 Disposal, vehicle battery 269 Distance control, see PDC 180 Distance to destination 133 Divided screen view, split screen 35 Downhill control, see Hill Descent Control HDC 166 290 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Everything from A to Z Drive-off assistant 170 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 164 Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 153 Driver profiles 72 Driver profiles, exporting profiles 74 Driver profiles, importing profiles 74 Driving Dynamics Control 168 Driving Excitement, SPORT 134 Driving instructions, breaking in 216 Driving mode, ECO PRO 224 Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ trol 168 Driving note, ECO PRO 226 Driving notes, general 217 Driving on bad roads 216 Driving on racetracks 219 Driving stability control systems 164 Driving, Start/Stop button 99 Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 228 Driving through water 218 Driving tips 217 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 164 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 166 DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chassis 169 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 164 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 166 E Easy Opener 68 ECO PRO 224 ECO PRO, bonus range 226 ECO PRO, driving style analysis 228 ECO PRO program, driving dynamics 169 ECO PRO, tip 226 Efficiency display, ECO PRO 226 EfficientDynamics, display 226 Electronic oil measurement 256 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 164 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Emergency braking, see PostCrash - iBrake 163 Emergency call 272 REFERENCE Emergency service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ tance 272 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 231 Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 119 Emergency wheel 251 Energy control 127 Energy recovery 128 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 101 Engine compartment 253 Engine coolant 260 Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 227 Engine oil 256 Engine oil, adding 257 Engine oil change 259 Engine oil filler neck 257 Engine oil types to add 258 Engine start, see Jump-starting 273 Engine start, see Starting the engine 100 Engine stop 101 Engine temperature, display 132 Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ tion 6 Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐ munication 6 Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Equipment, interior 199 Error displays, see Check Control 123 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 164 Exchanging, wheels and tires 240 Exhaust gas system 217 Exhaustion warner 162 Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 217 Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 91 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 91 Exterior mirrors 90 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 90 External start, see Jump-starting 273 External temperature display 127 External temperature warning 127 F Failure message, see Check Control 123 291 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 REFERENCE Everything from A to Z False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional alarms 77 Fan, see Air flow 193, 196 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 85 Fatigue alert 162 Filler neck for engine oil 257 Filter, see Microfilter 193 Fine wood, care 280 First-aid kit 271 Flat tire, changing wheels 247 Flat tire, continued driving 149, 153 Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 151 Flat tire message, FTM 152 Flat tire message, TPM 148 Flat Tire Monitor TPM 151 Flat tire, repairing 242 Flat tire warning light, FTM 152 Flat tire warning light, TPM 148 Flooding, driving through 218 Floor carpet, care 281 Floor mats, care 281 Fold-away position, wiper 109, 112 Foot brake 218 Forward Collision Warning with collision mitiga‐ tion 154 For Your Own Safety 7 Front airbags 143 Front lights 266 Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐ vation 145 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 146 Front seats 82 Fuel 232 Fuel cap 230 Fuel filler flap 230 Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 231 Fuel gauge 126 Fuel quality 232 Fuel recommendation 232 Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 285 Fuses 269 G Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 199 Gasoline 232 Gear change, Steptronic transmission 114 Gear shift indicator 129 General driving notes 217 General settings 46 Glare shield 202 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 81 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sunroof 79 Glove compartment 212 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 47 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Gross vehicle weight, approved 285 H Handbrake, see Parking brake 104 Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 200 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Hazard warning flashers 271 HDC Hill Descent Control 166 Head airbag 144 Headlight control, automatic 139 Headlight flasher 106 Headlight glass 265 Headlights 266 Headlights, care 279 Head restraints and seats 82 Head restraints, front 87 Head restraints, rear 88 Head-up Display 135 Head-up Display, care 281 Head-up Display, store position, see Memory function 89 Heated steering wheel 92 Heavy cargo, stowing 221 Height, vehicle 284 High-beam Assistant 140 High beams 106 High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐ tant 140 Hill Descent Control HDC 166 Hills 219 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 170 Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 213 292 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Everything from A to Z HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 199 Homepage, see Internet 6 Hood 254 Horn 30 Hot exhaust gas system 217 HUD Head-up Display 135 Hydroplaning 218 I iBrake - PostCrash 163 Ice warning, see External temperature warn‐ ing 127 Icy roads, see External temperature warning 127 Identification marks, tires 238 Identification number, see Vehicle identification number 12 iDrive 34 Ignition off 99 Ignition on 99 Indicator and warning lights, see Check Con‐ trol 123 Indicator light, front-seat passenger airbags 146 Indicator light, see Check Control 123 Individual air distribution 193, 196 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 72 Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 205 Inflation pressure, tires 234 Inflation pressure warning TPM, tires 151 Info Display 131 Information 6 Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 151 Input, iDrive 34 Instrument cluster 122 Instrument lighting 141 Integrated key 64 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 57 Integrated Universal Remote Control 199 Intelligent emergency call 272 Intelligent Safety 153 Intended use 7 Intensity, AUTO program 196 Interior equipment 199 Interior lights 142 REFERENCE Interior lights during unlocking 61 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 62 Interior mirror 90 Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 91 Interior mirror, manually dimmable 91 Interior motion sensor 77 Internet page 6 Interval display, service notifications 128 Interval mode 107, 110 In the vicinity of the center console 32 In the vicinity of the roofliner 33 J Jacking points for the vehicle jack 250 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 80 Jam protection system, windows 78 Joystick, Steptronic transmission 114 Jump-starting 273 K Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 66 Key, mechanical 64 Key, see Vehicle key 60 Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 117 Knee airbag 144 L Label on recommended tires 241 Lane departure warning 160 Lane threshold, warning 160 Language, set 46 LATCH child restraint fixing system 95 Launch Control 120 Leather care 280 LED headlights 266 LEDs, light-emitting diodes 265 Length, vehicle 284 Letters and numbers, entering 34 Light-alloy wheels, care 280 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 265 Lighter 202 Lighting 138 Light replacement 265 293 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 REFERENCE Everything from A to Z Light replacement, front 266 Light replacement, rear 266 Lights 138 Lights and bulbs 265 Light switch 138 List, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 131 List of all messages 48 Load 221 Loading 220 Loading the cargo area, see Stowing cargo 221 Location, vehicle position 47 Locking, automatic 75 Locking, see Opening and Closing 60 Locking, settings 74 Lock, lug bolts 249 Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐ tant 140 Low beams, operation 138 Lower back support, see Lumbar support 83 Lug bolt lock 249 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage rack 222 Lumbar support 83 M Maintenance 262 Maintenance recommendations, see Condition Based Service CBS 262 Maintenance, service notifications 128 Maintenance system, BMW 262 Make-up mirror 202 Malfunction displays, see Check Control 123 Manual air flow 193 Manual brake, see Parking brake 104 Manual control, air distribution 193, 196 Manual control, air flow 196 Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol 181 Manual operation, rearview camera 184 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Matt paint, care 279 Maximum cooling 195 Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit Info 129 Maximum speed, winter tires 241 Measuring units 47 Media of the Owner's Manual 57 Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 271 Memory function 89 Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 131 Menus 38 Menus, operating, iDrive 34 Messages 48 Messages, see Check Control 123 Microfilter 193, 197 Minimum tread, tires 239 Mirrors 90 Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐ cle 218 Mobile phone, connecting 50 Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Mobile Service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ tance 272 Mobility System 243 Mode, ECO PRO 224 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Safety 7 Moisture in headlight 265 Monitor, see Control Display 36 Mounting of child restraint systems 94 MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 M sports steering 168 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 30 Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐ igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 N Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints front 87 Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints rear 88 Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels, care 280 New wheels and tires 240 294 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Everything from A to Z Notifications 48 No-touch closing of the tailgate 68 No-touch opening of the tailgate 68 O OBD Onboard Diagnosis 263 OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 263 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 185 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel grade 233 Odometer 126 Oil 256 Oil, adding 257 Oil change 259 Oil filler neck 257 Oil service interval, service notifications 128 Oil types to add, engine 258 Onboard literature, printed 57 Onboard vehicle tool kit 264 On-call service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ tance 272 Opening and closing 60 Operating concept, iDrive 34 Operating via iDrive 38 Operation via touchscreen 39 Operation via voice 42 Operation with the Controller 38 Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 Outside air, see Automatic Recirculating Air Con‐ trol 196 Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor‐ age 281 Owner's Manual, printed 57 P Paint, car care 279 Pair device 50 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 76 Panic mode 76 Panoramic glass sunroof 79 Parallel parking assistant 186 Park Distance Control PDC 180 Parked vehicle, condensation 219 Parking aid, see PDC 180 REFERENCE Parking assistant 186 Parking brake 104 Parking lights 138 Parts and accessories 8 Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down, see Automatic Curb Monitor 91 Pathway lighting 139 Pathway lines, rearview camera 185 Payload, technical data 285 PDC Park Distance Control 180 Pedestrian Collision Warning with City Collision Mitigation 157 Performance Control 166 Personal data, deleting 49 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 72 Phone, connecting 50 Plastic, care 281 PostCrash - iBrake 163 Power failure 269 Power windows 78 Pressure, tires 234 Pre-ventilation 198 Printed onboard literature 57 Profiles, see Driver profiles 72 Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 40 Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam pro‐ tection system 80 Protective function, windows, see Jam protec‐ tion system 78 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 36, 37 R Racetrack operation 219 Radiator fluid 260 Radio-ready state 99 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communication 6 Rain sensor 107, 110 Rear lights 266 Rear seat backrests, folding down 209 Rear seats 84 Rearview camera 183 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 90 Rear window defroster 193, 197 Rear window wiper, operation 108, 112 295 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 REFERENCE Everything from A to Z Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/activatedcharcoal filter 197 Recirculated-air mode 192 Recommended fuel grade 233 Recommended tire brands 241 Refueling 230 Remaining range 127 Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐ book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ cation 6 Remote control, see Vehicle key 60 Remote control, universal 199 Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ tion 6 Replacing parts 264 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 63 Replacing, wheels and tires 240 Reporting safety malfunctions 13 RES CNCL button, camera-based cruise control, ACC 171 RES CNCL button, cruise control 177 Reserve warning, see Range 127 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 147 Retreaded tires 241 Roadside parking lights 139 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 200 RON recommended fuel grade 233 Roofliner 33 Roof-mounted luggage rack 222 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ tertainment, Communication 6 Rubber components, care 280 Run-flat tire 242 S Safe braking 218 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat 87 Safety belts 85 Safety belts, care 281 Safety locks, doors, and windows 98 Safety switch, windows 79 Safety systems, see Airbags 143 Saving fuel 223 Screen, see Control Display 36 Screwdriver, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 264 Sealant, see Mobility System 243 Seat heating, front 84 Seating position for children 93 Seats and head restraints 82 Seats, front 82 Seats, rear 84 Securing, cargo 221 Selection list in the instrument cluster 131 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 114 Sensors, care 281 Service and warranty 9 Service Center, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ tance 272 Service notifications, display 128 Service notifications, see Condition Based Serv‐ ice CBS 262 Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐ tion 6 Servotronic 168 SET button, camera-based cruise control, ACC 171 SET button, cruise control 177 Setting, Control Display 48 Settings, general 46 Settings, locking/unlocking 74 Settings, mirrors 90 Settings, seats and head restraints 82 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 118 Side airbag 143 Signaling, horn 30 Signals when unlocking 75 Sitting safely 82 Ski and snowboard bag 210 Slide/tilt glass roof 79 Smallest turning circle, vehicle 284 Smartphone, connecting 50 Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐ book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ cation 6 296 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Everything from A to Z Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 263 Sockets, electrical devices 202 Software update 55 Software, updating 55 SOS button 272 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 251 Speech recognition 42 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 129 Speed Limit Info 129 Speed, see Average speed 132 Speed warning 134 Split screen 35 Sport displays 134 SPORT program, driving dynamics 168 Sports steering 168 Stability control systems 164 Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 Start/stop, automatic function 101 Start/Stop button 99 Starting the engine 100 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Status control display, tires 147 Status information, iDrive 35 Status of Owner's Manual 7 Status, vehicle 136 Steering assistance 168 Steering column adjustment 92 Steering wheel, adjusting 92 Steering wheel, buttons 30 Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic transmission 114 Steptronic transmission 114 Stopping the engine 101 Storage compartment in the rear 213 Storage compartments 211 Storage compartments, locations 211 Storage, tires 242 Store Mirror position, see Memory function 89 Store seat position, see Memory function 89 Storing the vehicle 281 Stowing, cargo 221 Suitable devices 50 Suitable mobile phones 50 REFERENCE Summer tires, tread 239 Sun visor 202 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 57 Supplementary text message 126 Switches, see Dashboard 30 Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dynam‐ ics Control 168 Symbols 6 SYNC program, automatic climate control 197 T Tachometer 126 Tailgate, automatic 70 Tailgate, closing with no-touch activation 68 Tailgate, opening 70 Tailgate, opening with no-touch activation 68 Tailgate via vehicle key 62 Tail lights 266 Tank capacity 285 Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 7 Technical data 284 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Temperature, air conditioner 192 Temperature, automatic climate control 194 Temperature display for external tempera‐ ture 127 Temperature, engine 132 Terminal, starting aid 274 Text message, Check Control 126 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 76 Thigh support 83 Third-party provider, voice assistant 44 Tilt alarm sensor 77 Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror, see Automatic Curb Monitor 91 Time 46 Time of arrival 133 Tire brands, recommended 241 Tire chains 247 Tire damage 240 Tire identification marks 238 Tire inflation pressure 234 297 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 REFERENCE Everything from A to Z Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see TPM 151 Tire inflation pressure monitor TPM 151 Tire pressure 234 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 146 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 243 Tires 234 Tires, changing 240 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 243 Tires, run-flat 242 Tire tread 239 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐ tainment and Communication 6 Tool 264 Touchscreen 39 Towing 274 Tow-starting 274 TPM Flat Tire Monitor 151 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 146 Traction control 166 TRACTION, driving dynamics 166 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 119 Transmission lock, releasing manually 119 Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 114 Transporting children safely 93 Travel computer 133 Tread, tires 239 Trip computer 131 Triple turn signal activation 105 Trip odometer 126 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 126 Trunk, see Cargo area 207 Turning circle, vehicle 284 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 185 Turn signal, indicator light 125 Turn signals, operation 105 Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 266 U Unintentional alarm, avoiding 77 Units, see Measuring units 47 Universal remote control 199 Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 114 Unlocking, automatic 76 Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 60 Unlocking, settings 74 Unpaved roads, cross-country trips 216 Updates made after the editorial deadline 7 Updating, software 55 Upholstery care 280 Upper retaining strap, top tether 97 USB connection 53 USB port, general information 203 USB port, see USB port 203 Used battery, disposing of 269 Use, intended 7 Using a smartphone via voice control 44 V Vanity mirror 202 Vehicle battery 268 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis‐ tance 271 Vehicle, breaking in 216 Vehicle care 279 Vehicle care products 279 Vehicle equipment 7 Vehicle identification number 12 Vehicle jack 250 Vehicle key, additional 63 Vehicle key, integrated key 64 Vehicle key, loss 63 Vehicle key, malfunction 63 Vehicle key, opening/closing 60 Vehicle key, replacing the battery 63 Vehicle paint, care 279 Vehicle position, vehicle location 47 Vehicle status 136 Vehicle storage 281 Vehicle washing 278 Ventilation 197 Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 198 Venting, see Ventilation 197 Vent, see Ventilation 197 Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communication 6 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 12 Voice assistant, third-party provider 44 Voice command response 42 298 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 Everything from A to Z REFERENCE X Voice control 42 Voice control system 42 xDrive 166 W Warning and indicator lights, see Check Con‐ trol 123 Warning displays, see Check Control 123 Warning messages, see Check Control 123 Warning triangle 271 Warranty 8 Washer fluid 113 Washer nozzles, windshield 108, 111 Washer system 106, 109 Washing the vehicle 278 Washing, vehicle 278 Water on roads 218 Weights 285 Welcome lights 139 Welcome lights during unlocking 61 Wheel base, vehicle 284 Wheels 234 Wheels, changing 240 Width, vehicle 284 Windows, powered 78 Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 113 Windshield washer nozzles 108, 111 Windshield washer system, see Washer/wiper system 106, 109 Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 106, 109 Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor‐ age 281 Winter tires, suitable tires 241 Winter tires, tread 239 Wiper blades, replacing 264 Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 113 Wiper, fold-away position 109, 112 Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 106, 109 Wiper system 106, 109 Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 205 Wireless charging tray for smartphones 205 Wood, care 280 Word match concept, navigation 34 Working in, engine compartment 254 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 264 299 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 *BL5A2CF1600H* 01405A2CF16 ue Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 California Proposition 65 Warning For vehicles sold in California: Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21 The Ultimate Driving Machine® BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP. Your customized information about the vehicle in an app. Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline. *BL5A2CF1600H* 01405A2CF16 ue Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2CF16 - II/21